Menu

Revelation 21:21 — Word Study

Depth

N1904καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

BSAAndkai theho twelvedōdeka [a dozen, complete number] gates [were]pulōn twelvedōdeka [complete set] pearlsmargaritēs [with] eachhekastos [every single one] gatepulōn consistingeimi▸ ofek a singleehis [one, unified] pearlmargaritēs Theho main streetplateia [broad way, public square] of theho citypolis [was] purekatharos [clean, undefiled] goldchrusion ashōs cleardiaugazō [transparent, shining through] as glasshualos [like crystal, transparent material]

Word
Listen & take awayRevelation 21
English ↓ Download MP3 The Berean Standard Bible chapter audio already hosted for the site's Bible section — verse 21 is in this chapter.
Say the word Each Greek word carries its transliteration (diaugazō) — no per-word recordings of the Greek exist to link to.
Take it away
Revelation 21:21quick helps
In a sentenceThe twelve gates of the city are made of pearls, and the main street is pure gold, clear as glass.
Who is speakingThe author of Revelation, traditionally understood to be John.
Where we areIn the description of the New Jerusalem, highlighting its beauty and value.
The hard wordμαργαρίτης
Take awayThe imagery reflects the splendor and purity of God's eternal city.
8 commentators on this verse Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them › clause subjectὁ verbεἰμί The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
How rare are these words?in the New Testament

1 of 25 occurs nowhere else in the New Testament — a word chosen on purpose.

Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.

Deep Study — Revelation 21:21

Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.

Context — The New Jerusalemgenerated

20the fifth sardonyx, the sixth carnelian, the seventh chrysolite, the eighth beryl, the ninth topaz, the tenth chrysoprase, the eleventh jacinth, and the twelfth amethyst.
21And the twelve gates were twelve pearls, with each gate consisting of a single pearl. The main street of the city was pure gold, as clear as glass.
22But I saw no temple in the city, because the Lord God Almighty and the Lamb are its temple.
23And the city has no need of sun or moon to shine on it, because the glory of God illuminates the city, and the Lamb is its lamp.

Revelation 21:21 describes the New Jerusalem, emphasizing its magnificent gates made of pearls and streets of pure gold. This imagery reflects the beauty and splendor of the eternal dwelling place for God's people, contrasting with the earthly cities and their imperfections. The description serves to inspire hope and anticipation for believers regarding the future glory that awaits them.


Cross References

ReferenceText (BSB)
1Revelation 21:12The city had a great and high wall with twelve gates inscribed with the names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and twelve angels at the gates.
2Revelation 17:4The woman was dressed in purple and scarlet, and adorned with gold and precious stones and pearls. She held in her hand a golden cup full of abominations and the impurities of her sexual immorality.
3Matthew 13:45–46Again, the kingdom of heaven is like a merchant in search of fine pearls.
4Revelation 21:18The wall was made of jasper, and the city itself of pure gold, as pure as glass.
5Revelation 17:4The woman was dressed in purple and scarlet, and adorned with gold and precious stones and pearls. She held in her hand a golden cup full of abominations and the impurities of her sexual immorality.

The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 10 references, hung on the phrase they belong to


The Key Word — μαργαρίτης, margaritēsgenerated

The word μαργαρῖτης (margaritēs) means 'pearl' and is used in the plural form here to describe the twelve gates of the New Jerusalem. Pearls are precious gemstones formed through a natural process, symbolizing value and beauty.

In this context, the use of μαργαρῖται highlights the extraordinary nature of the gates, each made from a single pearl, which signifies the completeness and perfection of the city. The choice of pearls also suggests a connection to the teachings of Jesus, who spoke of pearls in parables to denote great worth.


How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated

The translations generally agree, using variations of 'pearls' for μαργαρῖται. The BSB, KJV, ASV, and others consistently translate it as 'pearls'.

Where they differ is in the rendering of ἕκαστος — some versions use 'each one' (ASV, WEB), while others opt for 'every' (BBE, KJV) or 'each' (BSB, YLT). The translations also vary slightly in their treatment of the verb ἦν, with some using 'were' and others 'was'.


Sentence Structuregenerated

The sentence contains a main clause with two subjects: οἱ πυλῶνες (the gates) and ἡ πλατεῖα (the street). The finite verb is ἦν (was), linking the subjects to their respective descriptions.

The structure includes a noun phrase for each subject, describing the gates as twelve pearls and the street as pure gold. The use of prepositional phrases adds detail about the nature of the street, comparing it to glass.


Septuagint Backgroundgenerated

μαργαρῖτης does not appear in the Septuagint, but the concept of pearls is present in various contexts, often symbolizing value and beauty.

The word for 'gold' used here, χρυσίον, is also found in the Septuagint, where it describes precious items and wealth, reinforcing the idea of the New Jerusalem as a place of great worth.


In plain words — the whole versegenerated

Revelation 21:21 describes the gates of the New Jerusalem as being made of twelve pearls, with each gate consisting of a single pearl. The main street of the city is made of pure gold, clear as glass. This imagery illustrates the beauty and value of the eternal city that God has prepared for His people.


Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated

What do the twelve gates represent?

The twelve gates symbolize the twelve apostles, who are foundational to the Christian faith, as they lead believers to eternal life.

Why is the street described as pure gold?

The pure gold represents the unmatched value and purity of the New Jerusalem, signifying a place free from corruption and sin.

What is the significance of pearls in this context?

Pearls are often associated with great worth and beauty, indicating that the gates of the city are precious and signify the glory of God's kingdom.

How does this description of the city compare to earthly cities?

The New Jerusalem is depicted as a place of unparalleled beauty and purity, contrasting with earthly cities that are often flawed and temporary.


Reflection Questionsgenerated

  1. What do the gates of the New Jerusalem tell us about God's kingdom?
  2. How can I reflect the purity and beauty of the New Jerusalem in my own life?
  3. What does the imagery of gold and pearls teach us about the value of spiritual treasures?
  4. In what ways can I share the hope of the New Jerusalem with others?

The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it

Several early church Fathers comment on the significance of the gates and pearls in Revelation 21:21, interpreting them as symbols of the apostles and the church's authority.

Caesarius of ArlesEXPOSITION ON THE APOCALYPSE 21:21, HOMILY 19 c. 470–542
These pearls symbolize the apostles, who are also called “gates” because through their teaching they make known the door of eternal life.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
Primasius of HadrumetumCOMMENTARY ON THE APOCALYPSE 21:21 d. c. 560
He had already said that the city was of pure gold, transparent as glass, and that its foundations were from every precious jewel. I think that this refers to those who have authority in the church.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →
Andreas of CaesareaCOMMENTARY ON THE APOCALYPSE 21:21 c. 563–637
The twelve gates are manifestly the twelve disciples of Christ, through whom we have come to know the door and the way. And they are also the twelve pearls that have received their splendor from the one, most precious pearl, namely, Christ.
Early Church Fathers on Revelation 21 →

Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse

Each of these wrote on Revelation 21:21 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.

John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire Bible

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls,.... Denoting the purity and preciousness of Christ, by whom the saints enter, and of the saints who enter in thereat, as well as of the place into which they enter.

Read John Gill on Revelation 21 →
Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's Commentary

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; every several gate was of one pearl: and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass. Every several - `each one severally.'

Read Robert Jamieson on Revelation 21 →
Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy Bible

I am not willing to descant further in particulars, conjecturing (for it is no more) what each metaphorical term signifies in this unusual description of a city. I do think the scope of the whole is no more, than to let us know that the mansions of heaven will be most glorious places, giving the souls of those to whom God shall give to enter into them, an infinite satisfaction, beyond what the most rich and glorious things in the world can give our outward senses.

Read Matthew Poole on Revelation 21 →
John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments

21 And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; every several gate was of one pearl: and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass. Ver. 21. And the twelve gates] i.e. Gatekeepers, preachers of the righteousness that is by faith. Were twelve pearls] All which do receive their lustre and worth from Christ, that pearl of price, Matthew 13:45-46, like as the pearl by being often beaten upon by the sunbeams, becometh radiant as the sun. Was pure gold] Which no dirty dog may ever trample upon.

Read John Trapp on Revelation 21 →
Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers

(21) And the twelve gates . . .—Or, gate-towers. Each gate was of one pearl—i.e., made out of one pearl. The foundations are diverse; the gates are alike. There is one way, though there are many roads; one mode of entrance, through twelve gates. All find entrance through one new and living Way (John 14:6; Acts 4:11-12; 1 Corinthians 3:11; Hebrews 10:20). The pearl was esteemed of the greatest value among the ancients; it is an appropriate emblem of the highest truth, and so of Him who is the Truth as well as the Way of Life. Lord Bacon compared truth to a pearl “that showeth best by day.” Another feature may be added. It is the only precious stone which the art and skill of man cannot…

Read Charles John Ellicott on Revelation 21 →
AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the Bible

Verse 21. The twelve gates were twelve pearls] This must be merely figurative, for it is out of all the order of nature to produce a pearl large enough to make a gate to such an immense city. But St. John may refer to some relations of this nature among his countrymen, who talk much of most prodigious pearls. I shall give an example: "When Rabbi Juchanan (John) once taught that God would provide jewels and pearls, thirty cubits every way, ten of which should exceed in height twenty cubits, and would place them in the gates of Jerusalem, according to what is said Isaiah 54:12, I will make thy windows of agates, and thy gates of carbuncles, one of his disciples ridiculed him, saying, Where…

Read AdamClarke on Revelation 21 →
CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges

21. pearls] Contrast Isaiah 54:12, where they are carbuncles.the street] Or “square:” see on Revelation 11:8. The City has one great space in the midst of it, like an Agora or Forum: but the word Agora would have associations, commercial or political, that would be incongruous with the repose of this city. It is probably the pavement of the street which, like the walls of the houses, is of transparent gold.

Read Cambridge on Revelation 21 →
Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the Bible

And the twelve gates - Revelation 21:12. Were twelve pearls - See the Revelation 17:4 note; Matthew 13:46 note. Every several gate was of one pearl - Each gate. Of course, this is not to be understood literally.

Read Albert Barnes on Revelation 21 →

The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company

Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.

Modern formal

BSBBerean Standard Bible2020

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls, with each gate consisting of a single pearl. The main street of the city was pure gold, as clear as glass.

WEBWorld English Bible2000

The twelve gates were twelve pearls. Each one of the gates was made of one pearl. The street of the city was pure gold, like transparent glass.

MSBMajority Standard Bible2022

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls, with each gate consisting of a single pearl. The main street of the city was pure gold, as clear as glass.

NETBNew English Translation2006

And the twelve gates are twelve pearls – each one of the gates is made from just one pearl! The main street of the city is pure gold, like transparent glass.

Tyndale line

KJVKing James Version1611

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; every several gate was of one pearl: and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass.

ASVAmerican Standard Version1901

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; each one of the several gates was of one pearl: and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass.

RVARevised Version, American1894

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; each one of the several gates was of one pearl: and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass.

NWBWebster's Bible1833

And the twelve gates were twelve pearls; every several gate was of one pearl; and the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass.

GNVGeneva Bible1599

And the twelue gates were twelue pearles, and euery gate is of one pearle, and the streete of the citie is pure golde, as shining glasse.

Strictly literal

DBYDarby Translation1890

And the twelve gates, twelve pearls; each one of the gates, respectively, was of one pearl; and the street of the city pure gold, as transparent glass.

YLTYoung's Literal Translation1862

And the twelve gates [are] twelve pearls, each several one of the gates was of one pearl; and the broad-place of the city [is] pure gold — as transparent glass.

LSVLiteral Standard Version2020

And the twelve gates [are] twelve pearls, each one of the gates respectively was of one pearl; and the street of the city [is] pure gold—as transparent glass.

ULBUnlocked Literal Bible2017

The twelve gates were twelve pearls; each of the gates was made from a single pearl. The streets of the city were pure gold, like transparent glass.

From the Latin

DRADouay-Rheims (Challoner)1899

And the twelve gates are twelve pearls, one to each: and every several gate was of one several pearl. And the street of the city was pure gold, as it were transparent glass.

Simplified

FBVFree Bible Version2020

The twelve gates were made of pearl, each one made from a single pearl. The main street was made of pure gold, clear like glass.

BBEBible in Basic English1949

And the twelve doors were twelve pearls; every door was made of one pearl; and the street of the town was clear gold, as clear as glass.

Word by word, the decisions they made

μαργαρῖται.margaritēs pearls. G3135 2 different renderings
pearlsASV BBE BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
pearlFBV
ἕκαστοςhekastos each G1538 4 different renderings
each oneASV DBY FBV LSV NETB RVA WEB
everyBBE DRA KJV NWB
eachBSB MSB ULB YLT
oneGNV
ἦνeimi was G1510 3 different renderings
wereASV BBE BSB DRA FBV GNV KJV MSB NWB RVA ULB WEB
areLSV NETB YLT
wasDBY
μαργαρίτου.¶margaritēs pearl. G3135 2 different renderings
pearlsASV BBE BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
pearlFBV
πλατεῖαplateia street G4116 2 different renderings
streetASV BBE BSB DBY DRA FBV KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA WEB
streetsULB
πόλεωςpolis city G4172 2 different renderings
cityASV BSB DBY DRA KJV LSV MSB NETB NWB RVA ULB WEB YLT
townBBE

Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.


The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank

This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.

clauseκαὶAndclausenoun phrase · subjectοἱthenoun phraseδώδεκαtwelveπυλῶνεςgates [were]noun phrase · predicateδώδεκαtwelveμαργαρῖταιpearlsclauseadverbialἀνὰrespectivelynoun phrase · subjectεἷςonenoun phraseἕκαστοςeachnoun phraseτῶνof theπυλώνωνgateslinking verbἦνwasprepositional phrase · predicateἐξofnoun phraseἑνὸςoneμαργαρίτουpearlclauseκαὶandclausenoun phrase · subjectἡthenoun phraseπλατεῖαstreetnoun phraseτῆςof theπόλεωςcitynoun phrase · predicateχρυσίονgoldκαθαρὸνpureprepositional phrase · adverbialὡςasnoun phraseὕαλοςglassδιαυγήςtransparent

Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.


The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac

Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.

Latin VulgateAD 382–405

Et duodecim portæ, duodecim margaritæ sunt, per singulas : et singulæ portæ erant ex singulis margaritis : et platea civitatis aurum mundum, tamquam vitrum perlucidum.

Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.

Syriac Peshittaby AD 400

ܘܬܪܥܣܪ ܬܪܥܐ ܘܬܪܬܥܣܪܐ ܡܪܓܢܝܬܐ ܚܕܐ ܠܚܕܐ ܘܟܠܚܕ ܡܢ ܬܪܥܐ ܐܝܬ ܗܘܐ ܡܢ ܚܕܐ ܡܪܓܢܝܬܐ ܘܫܘܩܐ ܕܝܢ ܕܡܕܝܢܬܐ ܕܕܗܒܐ ܕܟܝܐ ܐܝܟ ܙܓܘܓܝܬܐ ܐܝܬ ܒܗ

The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.

Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.


The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say

Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.

Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

The standard critical text of the New Testament.

Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993 · Deutsche Bibelgesellschaft

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

The previous edition, still widely cited.

SBL Greek New Testament2010 · Michael Holmes

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.

Westcott–Hort1881 · Westcott and Hort

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.

Tregelles1857–1879 · Samuel Prideaux Tregelles

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.

Tyndale House Greek NT2017 · Tyndale House, Cambridge

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.

Byzantine majority text2018 · Robinson–Pierpont

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος διαυγής.

The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.

Textus Receptus1550/1894 lineage

καὶ οἱ δώδεκα πυλῶνες δώδεκα μαργαρῖται. ἀνὰ εἷς ἕκαστος τῶν πυλώνων ἦν ἐξ ἑνὸς μαργαρίτου.¶ Καὶ ἡ πλατεῖα τῆς πόλεως χρυσίον καθαρὸν ὡς ὕαλος —

The printed tradition behind the King James Version.

Every witness on this verse they differ
Critical editions
Nestle-Aland 28th edition2012Nestle-Aland 27th edition1993SBL Greek New Testament2010Westcott–Hort1881Tregelles1857–1879Tyndale House Greek NT2017
Byzantine / Majority
Byzantine majority text2018
Received Text
Textus Receptus1550/1894

A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.

Word by word, across the editions

WordEditions carrying itMissing from
διαυγής. translucent.NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, ByzTR

The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with

This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.

Revelation 21:21καίAndAndκαίὁthetheὁδώδεκαtwelvetwelveδώδεκαπυλώνgates [weregates [were]πυλώνδώδεκαtwelvetwelveδώδεκαμαργαρίτηςpearls.pearls.μαργαρίτηςἀνάeacheachἀνάεἷςoneoneεἷςἕκαστοςeacheachἕκαστοςὁof theof theὁπυλώνgatesgatesπυλώνεἰμίwaswasεἰμίἐκofofἐκεἷςoneoneεἷςμαργαρίτηςpearl.pearl.μαργαρίτηςκαίandandκαίὁthetheὁπλατύςstreetstreetπλατύςὁof theof theὁπόλιςcitycityπόλιςχρυσίονgoldgoldχρυσίονκαθαρόςpurepureκαθαρόςὡςasasὡςὕαλοςglassglassὕαλοςδιαυγηςtranslucenttranslucent.διαυγηςδύοAdj. & IndAdj. & Indec.nuδύοπύληn.f. a doon.f. a door, gaπύλημηδείςAdj no oneAdj no one, notμηδείςπλάσσωv. I form,v. I form, moulπλάσσωπολύςAdj much, Adj much, many,πολύςὅςRel.pr. whRel.pr. who, whὅςχρυσόςn.m. anythn.m. anything mχρυσόςὑετόςn.m. rainn.m. rainὑετόςφυλήn.f. a trin.f. a tribe, rφυλήχιλιάςn.f. a thon.f. a thousandχιλιάςτρεῖςAdj threeAdj threeτρεῖςδώδεκαIndec.num.Indec.num. twelδώδεκατίμιοςAdj of greAdj of great prτίμιοςλίθοςn.m. a ston.m. a stoneλίθοςμέλοςn.n. a limn.n. a limb, meμέλοςἕκαστοςAdj each, Adj each, everyἕκαστοςὕαλοςn.m. glassn.m. glassὕαλοςδηνάριονn.n. a denn.n. a denariusδηνάριον
meets it a little oftener than chancemeets it far oftener than chancebuilt from the same roottwo words of the verse share ita word of this versea related word

Lexicons — every word in Revelation 21:21

One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.

Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
καὶkai And G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίAnd8978×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
οἱho the G3588 Article · nominative · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NPM — Article · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
ὁthe19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
δώδεκαdōdeka twelve G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
a dozen, complete number
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
ὁArticle theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoὁArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
ὁArticle the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
ὁArticle theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
πυλῶνεςpulōn gates [were] G4440 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A gate-way or porch is an entrance to a building or city, used in Matthew 26:71 and Acts 10:17 to describe where events took place.
Tyndale gloss
gate
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πυλών (i.e., *pulōn*) refers to a gateway or porch, often associated with the entrance of a house or palace. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to gates of cities and the vestibules of buildings. The term is built from the root related to 'gate' and is noted for its use in both secular and religious architecture.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυλών, -ῶνος, ὁ

(< πύλη),

[in LXX chiefly for פֶּתַח, שַׁעַר;]

the porch or vestibule of a house or palace: Mt 26:71, Lk 16:20, Ac 10:17 12:13, 14.

The gate-way or gate-tower of a walled town: Ac 14:13, Re 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25 22:14.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυλών, -Ovos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. often for Nd, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate: of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. (of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 15, 21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house, into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυλῶνος, ib. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πυλών, “gateway ” of a house (Mt 267) or city (Ac 1414) : P Tebt Il. 331° (c. A.D. 131) ἐπῆλθοίν αἸὐὐθάδως els ἣν exw ἐν TH κώμῃ οἰκίαν. . ἐν τῶ πυλῶνι, ‘made a bold attack upon my house in the village . . at the gateway ᾿᾿ (Edd.), P Ryl II. 233° (ii/A.D.) κωμοκάτοικοί εἰσιν ot ἔζχο]ντες πρὸ Tod πυλῶνός σου τὸν ψιλὸν τόπον, ‘the owners of the open plot in front of your gateway are villagers,” and the illiterate P Oxy XII. 14898 (late iii/A.D.) τὸ κιθώνιν ἐπιλέλισμε (ἡ ἐπιλέλησμαι) παρὰ Τεκοῦσαν eis τὸν πυλῶνα, ‘I have left my cloak behind with Tecusa at the gateway” (Edd.). Psaltes Gr. p. 24 n.' has collected exx. of the late form πυλεών. For πύλιον see Preisigke 2098", 52557.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυλών (pulōn) — gate.

πυλ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

gateway, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently separated from the house or temple to which it gave entrance, gate-tower, gate-house, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; of a temple, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τετράθυρος π. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἡ θύρα τοῦ π. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυλών

pulon

from 4439; a gate-way, door-way of a building or city; by implication,

a portal or vestibule:--gate, porch.

see GREEK for 4439

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυλών, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a large gate, a gateway, porch

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυλών pylōn 18x

a gateway, vestibule, Mt. 26:71; Lk. 16:20; a gate, Acts 14:13; Rev. 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυλών πυ^λών, ῶνος, ὁ, πύλη a gateway, gate-house, Polyb., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of cities De 3:5; Jos 6:26; 1Sa 23:7; 2Sa 18:24; 2Ch 8:5

→ Made of iron Ac 12:10

→ Made of wood Ne 1:3

→ Made of brass Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

→ Double doors Isa 45:1; Eze 41:24

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Design of

Isa 62:10

- MADE OF

. Brass

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

. Iron

Ac 12:10

- Often two-leaved

Isa 45:1

- Fastened with bars of iron

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

- MADE TO

. Cities

1Ki 17:10

. Houses

Lu 16:20; Ac 12:14

. Temples

Ac 3:2

. Palaces

Es 5:13

. Prisons

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Of Cities and Towns as places of Business

Ge 23:10; 34:20; De 16:18; 21:19; 22:15; Jos 20:4; Ru 4:1

2Sa 15:2; 1Ki 22:10; Pr 1:21; 22:22; Jer 14:2; Zec 8:16

(2) Punishment of Criminals outside of

De 17:5; Jer 20:2; Heb 13:12

(3) Of Jerusalem

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%gates
gates67% · 12×gate28% · 5×porch6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject39%adverbial33%object22%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,εἰς
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
ἀνατολήrising of the sun, t
ἀπό
βορρᾶςthe north wind, the
ἀπό
νότοςthe south wind, the
ἀπό
πυλώνgates [were]18×
what comes after →
τρεῖςthree
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ἑλκόωI afflict with sκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
δώδεκαIndec
καίand, even, also,μαργαρίτηςa pearl
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
αὐτός
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
παιδίσκηa female slave,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυλών · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.40c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις τοῦ θαλάμου ἐκτὸς μέν ἐστιν ὁ ἀνδρών, ἐντὸς δὲ ὁ αὐλών, καὶ ἡ αὔλειος ἐκτὸς μὲν τῆς αὐλῆς, εἴσω δὲ τοῦ πυλῶνος, οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ ψυχῆς δύναται τὸ ἐκτός τινος ἐντὸς εἶναι [τοῦ] ἑτέρου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.111c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 48.4c. AD 96

πολλῶν οὖν πυλῶν ἀνεῳγυιῶν ἡ ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν ᾗ μακάριοι πάντες οἱ εἰσελθόντες καὶ κατευθύνοντες τὴν πορείαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, ἀταράχως πάντα ἐπιτελοῦντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 10 1149Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 14

των τῶν πυλῶν ἐν αὐτῶι τῶι ἱερῶι ἰδιώτας γει… … αι βυσσουργούς τε καὶ ἀρτοκόπους καὶ ἕτερα

P.Mich. 5 226Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 37

κραταιοῦ θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγίστου θησαυρὸν ἐνεργὸν ἐν ὧι πύργος καὶ προσπαρακείμενος ἕτερος πύργος καὶ πυλών, ἡμῶν δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑτέρων ἡμῶν ἱερέων παραλαμβανόντων παρὰ τῶν προγεγραμμένων Ἀπύνχεως καὶ τῆς

P.Theon. 21OxyrhynchitesAD 160

Ἰουλίων Θέωνος καὶ Θέωνος τοῦ καὶ Τρύφωνος Δε … μ … … … … πυλῶνος ἱππῶνος τιμῆς ἐλαίου εἰς λύχνον πυλῶνος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἱππῶνος ὑπὲρ Τῦβι κοτυλῶν β, ἐξ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
δώδεκαdōdeka twelve G1427 Adjective · nominative
75× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means the number twelve, like the twelve apostles in Matthew 10:1. It is used to describe a dozen of something in the Bible.
Amplified meaning
complete set
Tyndale gloss
twelve
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word δώδεκα (i.e., *dodeka*) means 'twelve' and is used as a numeral. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably referring to the twelve apostles. The word is formed from the components for 'two' and 'ten' and is recognized across different dialects and historical texts.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

δώδεκα, οἱ, αἱ, τά indecl.

numeral, twelve: Mt 9:20 10:1, al.; οἱ δ., the apostles, Mt 10:5, Mk 4:10, al.; in Ac 19:7 24:11, for Rec. δεκαδύο.

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

δώδεκα, οἱ. ai, τά, [fr. Hom. down], twelve: Mt. ix. 20; x. 1; [L T Tr WH in Acts xix. 7; xxiv. 11 for δεκαδύο] ; Rev. vii. 5 [R Gu’); xxi. 21, ete. ; of δώδεκα, the twelve apostles of Jesus, so called by way of eminence: Mk. ix. BITS 35 BIDE Χτ TOUR hts ce-an IZ DING Π.Κ' χΧῚ 9; δδε

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

δώδεκα (dōdeka) — twelve.

δῠώδεκα,

Ionic dialect, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry; Attic dialect δώδεκα, twelve, in all genders, [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—also δυόδεκο, [Refs 4th c.BC+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

δώδεκα

dodeka

from 1417 and 1176; two and ten, i.e. a dozen:--twelve.

see GREEK for 1417

see GREEK for 1176

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

δώδεκα

Indec.num.

twelve

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

δώδεκα dōdeka 75x

twelve, Mt. 9:20; 10:1; οἱ δώδεκα, the twelve apostles, Mt. 26:14, 20

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

δώδεκα δύο, δέκα twelve, Hom., etc.: v. δυώδεκα.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NUI — Adjective · nominative
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NUI Indeclinable NUmeral (Adjective)

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

twelv (shenem `asar; dodeka).

See APOSTLE; NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
99%twelve
twelve99% · 76×other renderings1% · 1×

77 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject41%object31%adverbial12%predicate11%indirect object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 75 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
εἷςoneδέbut, on the otheμετά
ἔτοςa year
γάρforγίνομαιI come into beinὡςas, like as, how
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakἀπόἐπί
κλάσμαa fragment
ὁArticle theαἴρωI raise, lift up
πυλώνa large gate, a gate
ἔχωI have, hold, poδώδεκαIndec
δώδεκαtwelve75×
what comes after →
χιλιάςa thousand
ἐκσφραγίζωI set a seal upoὁArticle the
καίand, even, also, nam
ἐπίἐπιτίθημιI put, place upoἐξίστημιI astonish, am a
ὁArticle the
λέγωI say, speakπαραβολήa parable, compaἐμβάπτωI dip into
φυλήa tribe, race
ὁArticle theκρίνωI judge, decide,υἱόςa son, descenden
μαθητήςa learner, disciple,
αὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceδώδεκα · 75× in the New Testament
Revelation Mark Matthew Luke John Acts 1 Corinthians James
Across the New Testament8 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 36 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 60c. AD 40

ἐκ γὰρ μιᾶς ἡμέρας τὸ ἓν καὶ ἐκ δυοῖν τὰ δύο καὶ ἐκ τριῶν τὰ τρία καὶ ἐκ μηνὸς τὰ τριάκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἐνιαυτοῦ τὸ ἰσάριθμον ταῖς ἐκ δώδεκα μηνῶν ἡμέραις πλῆθος καὶ ἐξ ἀπείρου χρόνου ὁ ἄπειρος ἀριθμός.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

Ἰακώβου φυγὴ εἰς τὴν Μεσοποταμίαν καὶ τὸν ἐκ τἀδελφοῦ φόβον, καὶ ὡς γήμας ἐκεῖ καὶ δώδεκα γεννήσας παῖδας πάλιν εἰς τὴν Χαναναίαν ἐπανῆλθεν.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 43.2c. AD 96

ἐκεῖνος γάρ, ζήλου ἐμπεσόντος περὶ τῆς ἱερωσύνης καὶ στασιαζουσῶν τῶν φυλῶν, ὁποία αὐτῶν εἴη τῷ ἐνδόξῳ ὀνόματι κεκοσμημένη, ἐκέλευσεν τοὺς δώδεκα φυλάρχους προσενεγκεῖν αὐτῷ ῥάβδους ἐπιγεγραμμένας ἑκάστης φυλῆς κατ̓ ὄνομα: καὶ λαβὼν αὐτὰς ἔδησεν καὶ…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Athen.. 21Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 131

ἐν χρήσει, τόκου δραχμιαίου τῇ μνᾷ τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον, ἔτι δὲ καὶ πυροῦ ἀρτάβας δώδεκα ἕκτον μέτρῳ ἑξαχοινίκῳ ἑρμηνέως Καρανίδος, ὧν καὶ τὴν ἀπόδοσιν ποιησάτω ἡ ὁμολογοῦσα τῶι Πεθεῖ

P.Harr. 2 190Ptolemais Euergetis (Arsinoites)AD 138

Νεμεσίων … … … ρος ἀπελευθερο Ἀμμωνίου τοῦ Ἀμμωνίου λαογραφίας κα ἔτους Ἑλληνείου δραχμὰς δώδεκα, γίνονται δραχμαὶ ιβ προσδιαγραφομένων χαλκοῦ ὀβολοὶ ἕξ .

O.Wilck. 2 192Elephantine oder SyeneAD 143

μισθωταὶ ἱερᾶς πύλης Σοήνης διὰ Παχομψᾶχις βοηθοῦ. διέγραψεν Πετοννόφρις Ἁρμάχιος ὑπὲρ μερισμοῦ β δραχμὰς δώδεκα ὀβολοὺς τρεῖς δραχμὰς ιβ τριώβολον ἔτους ϛ Ἀντωνείνου Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου Παχὼν ιγ.

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
μαργαρῖται.margaritēs pearls. G3135 Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A margarites is a pearl, a valuable gemstone. Jesus uses it in a parable in Matthew 13:45-46 to describe something very precious.
Tyndale gloss
pearl
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μαργαρίτης, transliterated as margaritēs, means 'a pearl.' It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew and Revelation, often symbolizing something precious. The word is derived from margaros, referring to a pearl oyster, and is used proverbially in Matthew 7:6 to describe the act of sharing sacred teachings with those unworthy of them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* μαργαρίτης, -ου, ὁ,

a pearl: Mt 13:45, 46, I Ti 2:9, Re 17:4 18:12, 16 21:21 (-ῖται, WH); proverbially, Mt 7:6.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μαργαρίτης, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL TWH accent -pira, RG Tr -pira (cf. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 101)]; τοὺς μαργαρίτας βάλλειν ἔμπρυσθεν χοίρων, a proverb, i. 6. to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (incompetent as they are, through their hostility to the gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt. vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μαργαρίτης (margaritēs) — pearl.

μαργᾰρ-ίτης [ῑ], ου, ὁ,

pearl, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: -ῖτις λίθος, ἡ, Androsth. cited in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; -ῖτις alone, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; -ίς alone, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. -ίτης χερσαῖος, an unidentified precious stone, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μαργαρίτης

margarites

from margaros (a pearl-oyster); a pearl:--pearl.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μαργαρίτης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a pearl

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μαργαρίτης margaritēs 9x

a pearl, Mt. 7:6; 13:45, 46; 1 Tim. 2:9; Rev. 17:4; 18:12, 16; 21:21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μαργαρίτης μαργα^ρί_της, ου, ὁ, a pearl, Theophr., etc.

A Persian word.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NPM — Noun · nominative · plural · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Were ranked by the ancients among the most precious substances, Re 17:4, and were highly valued as ornaments for women. Their modest splendor still charms the Orientals, and a string of pearls is a favorite decoration of eastern monarchs. The kingdom of heaven is compared to a goodly pearl, so superior to all others that the pearl merchant sold all others that he could obtain for it the highest price, Mt 13:45,46. The gates of heaven are described as consisting of pearls; "every several gate was one pearl," Re 21:21. The Savior forbade his apostles to cast their pearls before swine, Mt 7:6; that is, to expose the precious truths of the gospel unnecessarily to those who…

Thompson Chain Reference topics

Mt 13:45; 1Ti 2:9; Re 17:4; 18:12; 21:21

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%pearls
pearls67% · 6×pearl22% · 2×pearl!11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%adverbial33%predicate22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
τίμιοςof great price,
ὁArticle the
βάλλωI cast, throw, r
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
ζητέωI seek, search f
πολύτιμοςof great value
εἷςone
ἤDisj
χρυσίονa golden ornamen
μαργαρίτηςpearls.9×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
βύσσινοςof fine linen, cὁArticle the
σύ
ἔμπροσθεν
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go away fr
πιπράσκωI sell
ἤDisj
ἱματισμόςraiment, clothin
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ποτήριονa drinking cup

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμαργαρίτης · 9× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch
Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.11.2c. AD 110

χωρὶς τούτου μηδὲν ὑμῖν πρεπέτω, ἐν ᾧ τὰ δεσμὰ περιφέρω, τοὺς πνευματικοὺς μαργαρίτας, ἐν οἷς γένοιτό μοι ἀναστῆναι τῆ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν, ἦς γένοιτό μοι ἀεὶ μέτοχον εἶναι, ἵνα ἐν κλήρῳ Ἐφεσίων εὑρεθῶ τῶν Χριστιανῶν, οἳ καὶ τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πάντοτε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
5th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 15 1568OxyrhynchosAD 401–AD 600

χμγ Μηνᾶς Ἰακὼβ γεωργῷ ἀπὸ Ὤφεως· κατέβαλες ἐπὶ Μαργαρίτην τὸν παῖδα ἐπὶ μηνὸς Ἁθὺρ τετάρτης ἰνδικτίονος νομίσματα πέντε, οὕτως· ὑπὲρ μὲν

CPR 8 56Herakleopolites (?)AD 401–AD 600

Ἰωάννῃ ἀδελφῷ σίτου ἀρτάβαι … δ Ἀγάθῳ ἀδελφῷ σίτου ἀρτάβαι ϛ φακοῦ ἀρτάβαι … Μαργαρίτῃ Ἀλεξανδρῖ πατρὶ αὐτῶν σίτου ἀρτάβαι θ φακοῦ ἀρτάβαι … Ἰωάννῃ ἄπα Ὧλ σίτου ἀρτάβαι

τὸ δὲ ναῦλον κελεύσῃ δοῦναι ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ὅσον ἂν θε … τὸν αὐτὸν οὖν μαργαρίτην κέλευσον πεμφθῆναι μετὰ τῶν σκευῶν ἐνταῦθα ἵνα καὶ παραδῶ αὐτά, εἰ καί, ὅτι ζῇ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἀνὰana each G303 Preposition
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This Greek word means each or every, used to describe individual items. In Matthew 20:9-10, it refers to workers receiving a denarius apiece. It can also mean 'by' or 'in', as seen in 1 Corinthians 14:27.
Tyndale gloss
each
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἀνά (ana) is a preposition meaning 'up' and is used with various cases, primarily the accusative. It conveys a sense of upward motion or distribution, as seen in phrases like ἀνὰ μέσον ('between') and ἀνὰ δηνάριον ('at the rate of a denarius'). In the New Testament, it appears in limited contexts, often indicating division or proportion, and is rare overall.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἀνά

prep. (the rarest in NT; M, Pr., 98; MM, VGT, s.v.), prop.,

upwards, up, always c. acc.

In phrases: ἀ. μέσον, among, between, c. gen., Mt 13:25, Mk 7:31, I Co 6:5 (M, Pr., 99), Re 7:17 [so in LXX for בְּתוֹךְ]; ἀ. μέρος, in turn, I Co 14:27 (both found in Polyb.; cf. MGr. ἀνάμεσα).

Distrib., apiece, by: Mt 20:9-10, Lk 9:3 (WH om.), Lk 9:14 Lk 10:1, Jo 2:6,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἀνά, prep., prop. upwards, up, (ef. the adv. ἄνω, opp. to κατά and κάτω), denoting motion from a lower place to a higher [cf. W. 398 (372) n.]; rare in the N. T. and only with the accus. 1. in the expressions ἀνὰ μέσον (or jointly ἀνάμεσον [so R

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἀνά survives almost exclusively in the limited uses seen in NT. The new ‘‘improper preposition” ἀνὰ μέσον is common : cf. MGr ἀνάμεσα. Thus P Magd 2° (p.c. 221) ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ te Ἰ]οώριος [sc. τοίχου] καὶ τοῦ τοῦ ἀνδρός pov, Sy// 929% (ii/B.c.) τῆς κειμένης ἀνὰ μέσον ᾿Ιτανίων τε καὶ Ἵεραπυτνίων, P Petr I. r1® (iii/B.c.) οὐλὴ ἀνὰ μέσον ὀφρύων, zd. IIT. 37(a)". 15. (B.c. 257) χώματος τοῦ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ κλήρου, OG/S 56% (iii/B.c.) ὧν ἀνὰ μέσον ἔσται ἡ ἀσπιδοειδὴς βασιλεία (a crown adorned with serpents), P Oxy I. 999 (A.D. 55) ava μέσον οὔσης τυφλῆς ῥύμης, etc. In Sy// 3344 (B.C. 73) περὶ ἀντιλογιῶν τῶν ἀνάμ{εσον] θεῶι ᾿Αμφιαράωι καὶ τῶν δημοσιωνῶν γεγονότων Dittenberger (who here prints as one word) comments on the barbarous grammar, the preposition taking dative and genitive together. "Ava λόγον “in proportion” is not rare : e.g. P Ryl II. 96!4(a.p. 117-8) (ἀρούρας) δή (= 8) ἀνὰ λόγον τῆς…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἀνά (ana) — each.

ἀνά [ᾰνᾰ],

Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 4th c.AD+] ὀν, preposition governing genitive, dative, and accusative By apocope ἀνά becomes ἄν before dentals, as ἂν τὸν ὀδελό; ἄγ before gutturals, as ἂγ γύαλ; ἄμ before labials, as ἂμ βωμοῖσι, ἂμ πέτραις, etc.; ἀμπεπλεγμένας[Refs 4th c.AD+]

__A WITH GEN., three times in [Refs 8th c.BC+] go on board ship, [Refs]; ἂν τοῦ τοίχου, τᾶς ὁδοῦ, τοῦ ῥοειδίου, [Refs]

__B WITH DAT., on, upon, without any notion of motion, Epic dialect, Lyric poetry, and Trag. (only Lyric poetry), ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ upon the sceptre, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀνὰ ὤμῳ upon the shoulder, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἀν ἵπποις, i. e. in a chariot, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἀνά

ana

a primary preposition and adverb; properly, up; but (by extension)

used (distributively) severally, or (locally) at (etc.):--and, apiece,

by, each, every (man), in, through. In compounds (as a prefix) it

often means (by implication) repetition, intensity, reversal, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἀνά

Prep.

and, apiece, by, each, every, in, through

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἀνά ana 13x

prep. used in the NT only in certain forms. ἀνὰ μέρος, in turn; ἀνὰ μέσον, through the midst, between; ἀνὰ δηνάριον, at the rate of a denarius; with numerals, ἀνὰ ἑκατόν, in parties of a hundred. In composition, step by step, up, back, again

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἀνά prep. governing gen., dat., and acc. Radic. sense, up, upon, opp. to κατά.

WITH GEN., ἀνὰ νηός on board ship, Od.

WITH DAT., on, upon, ἀνὰ σκήπτρωι upon the sceptre, Il.; ἀνὰ ὤμωι upon the shoulder, Od.

WITH ACC., the comm. usage, implying motion upwards:

of Place, up to, up along, ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν Hdt.; ἀνὰ δῶμα up and down the house, throughout it, Il.; so, ἀνὰ στρατόν, ἄστυ, ὅμιλον Hom.; ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχειν to have continually in the mouth, id. Hom.

of Time, throughout, ἀνὰ νύκτα Il.; ἀνὰ τὸν πόλεμον Hdt.; ἀνὰ χρόνον in course of time, id. Hdt.; ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν ἡμέραν id. Hdt.; but, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, distributively, day by day, id. Hdt.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
38%in
in38% · 5×each23% · 3×respectively8% · 1×the8% · 1×through8% · 1×apiece8% · 1×for8% · 1×

13 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial85%object8%subject8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
λαμβάνωI receive, takeἀρνίονa lamb
ζιζάνιονspurious wheat, darn
σπείρωI sow, spread, s
λαμβάνωI receive, take
ὥραan hour, season
ΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ὁArticle the
μήτεNeg
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekel
ἀνάeach13×
what comes after →
μέσοςmiddle, in the middl
ὁArticle the
δηνάριονa denarius
καίand, even, also,
δύο
χιτώνa tunic, garmentπρό
πεντήκονταIndec
μετρητήςa measure, amphora
δύο

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἀνά · 13× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation 1 Corinthians John Mark
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 135 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.65c. AD 40

καὶ ἔχθραν θήσω ἀνὰ μέσον σοῦ καὶ ἀνὰ μέσον τῆς γυναικός, καὶ ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ σπέρματός σου καὶ τοῦ σπέρματος αὐτῆς.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.111c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 26.2.3c. AD 140

εἱστήκεισαν δὲ εἰς τὰ τέσσαρα μέρη τῆς πύλης, ἀνὰ μέσον αὐτῶν ἀνὰ δύο παρθένοι.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. BC 2nd c. BC 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD

πυροῦ ιε ὧν πυροῦ ε λοιπὸν πυροῦ ι ἀνθʼ ὧν δέδωκα διὰ Πέλοπος χαλκοῦ ἀνὰ σ δραχμὰς Β ὧν ἐν Πέλοπι δραχμαὶ σ

BGU 3 998Pathyris102 BC

Νεχούτου τοῦ Πανεχάτου βορρᾶ οἰκία Κεφάλωνος ἀπηλιώτου ῥύμη λιβὸς οἰκία Πόρτιτος τοῦ Πετεσούχου ἧς ἀνὰ μέσον ῥύμη ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεῆσις Ὀνηοῦς Πέρσης ὡς ἐτῶν

P.Adl. 16Pathyris100 BC

τοῦ Πατοῦτος, βορρᾶ γῆ Πατσεοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, ἀπηλιώτου ποταμός, λιβὸς γῆ λεγομένης Ἁροήριος ἧς ἀνὰ μέσον ὁδός, ἄλλης λεγομένης Χῶμα, γείτονες νότου γῆ Ὀννώφριος τοῦ Ἰμούθου ἧς κρατεῖ Πετοσῖρις

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
εἷςehis one G1520 Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
336× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for one, used to describe unity or agreement, as seen in John 10:30 and Romans 12:4-5. It emphasizes oneness and togetherness. This concept is key in Christian teachings.
Amplified meaning
one, unified
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἷς is a cardinal numeral meaning 'one.' It contrasts with many and can function as a noun or adjective. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as emphasizing unity (e.g., John 10:30) or indicating exclusivity (e.g., Matthew 27:14). The entries note its use in phrases like 'one by one' and as an ordinal meaning 'first.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἷς, μιά, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός,

cardinal numeral, one;

one, as opp. to many: Mt 25:15, Ro 5:12, I Co 10:8, al.; as subst., Ro 5:15, Eph 2:14; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 5:19, al.; seq. ἐκ (ἐξ), Mk 14:18, Jo 6:8, al.; metaph., of union and concord, Jo 10:30 17:11, Ro 12:4, 5, Phl 1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Lk 14:18; c. neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἷς (ehis) — one.

εἷς, μίᾰ, ἕν

(μίη only in late Ionic dialect Prose): genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός:—Epic dialect ἕεις [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect ἧς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Ionic dialect feminine ἴᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter dative (ἰῷ κίον ἤματι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Orig. ἕνς, assim. ἔν (δ) probably in [Refs] Indo-European sem-(compare ὁμός); μία from sm-ί; ἴα is not related to μία, but probably to pronominal stem i-(Latin is), compareἰός.)

1. as a Numeral, εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; strengthened, εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, a single

__A one, one alone,[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b emphatically with a superlative, εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἷς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἷς

heis

(including the neuter (etc.) hen); a primary numeral; one:--a(-n, -ny,

certain), + abundantly, man, one (another), only, other, some. See

also 1527, 3367, 3391, 3762.

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 3367

see GREEK for 3391

see GREEK for 3762

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἷς, μία, ἕν

Adj

one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἱς heis 345x

numeral one, Mt. 10:29, freq.; only, Mk. 12:6; one virtually by union, Mt. 19:5, 6; Jn. 10:30; one and the same, Lk. 12:52; Rom. 3:30; one in respect of office and standing, 1 Cor. 3:8; equivalent to τις, a certain one, Mt. 8:19; 16:14; a, an, Mt. 21:19; Jas. 4:13; εἱς ἕκαστος, each one, every one, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%one
one93% · 334×other renderings5% · 19×other renderings2% · 6×

359 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial24%object20%predicate20%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 336 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
ὁArticle theγάρforδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
δεξιόςon the right hanπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveπωλέωI sell
ἐν
γίνομαιI come into beinδέbut, on the otheγάρfor
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπροσέρχομαιI come near, conἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
εἷςone336×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
δώδεκαIndecμικρόςlittle, smallθεόςGod, a god
ἐκ
ὁArticle theαὐτόςδεξιόςon the right han
ἕκαστοςeach, every one
αὐτόςὁArticle theκατά
εἰμίI am, exist
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐκ
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁArticle theΜωϋσῆςMosesἨλίαςElijah

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἷς · 336× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Acts Romans Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 444 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν μζ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα χαλκοῦ ταλάντου ἑνός . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην Πετεσοῦχος ὁ ἀποδόμενος ὃν ἐδέξατο

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἕκαστοςhekastos each G1538 Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
82× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The word 'each' or 'every' refers to individual things or people, like in Xenophon's writings and the Iliad by Homer. It helps us understand when all people or things are included in a group.
Amplified meaning
every single one
Tyndale gloss
each
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἕκαστος (i.e., *hekastos*) means 'each' or 'every.' It is often used with nouns, as in Luke 6:44, or can stand alone, as seen in Acts 4:35. The word can also appear in plural forms or with partitive genitives, indicating individual members of a group. There is some variation in how lexicons present its usage, particularly regarding its grammatical constructions.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* ἕκαστος, -η, ὂν, [in LXX chiefly for אִישׁ;]

each, every (Lat. quisque) ;

with a noun: Lk 6:44, Jo 19:23, seq. κατά, He 3:13, Re 22:2; εἷς ἕ., Eph 4:16;

without a noun: Ac 4:35, Ro 2:6, al.;

partit. gen., Ro 14:12, I Co 1:12, al.; in sing, with pl. verb, Lk 2:3, Ac 11:29, al.; in apposition with pl. noun or pron.,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἕκαστος, -7, -ov, Sept. for wx, [fr. Hom. down], each, a. joined to a substantive: ἕκαστον δένδρον, Lk. vi. 44; ἑκάστῳ στρατιώτῃ, Jn. xix. 23; κατὰ μῆνα ἕκαστον, every month, Rev. xxii. 2 [not Ree.]; καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν, Leb. iii. 13; ef. W. 111 (106); B. § 127, 30. preceded by εἷς, Lat. unusquisque, every one: with a substantive, Eph. iv. 16; Rev. xxii. 2 Ree. b. used substantively: Jn. vii. 53 [Rec.]; Acts iv. 35; Ro. ii. 6; Gal. vi. 4, ete.; once plur. ἕκαστοι : Rev. vi. 11 Ree. With a partitive genitive added: ἡμῶν, Ro. xiv. 12; ὑμῶν, Lk. xiii. 15; 1 Co. 1. 12; Heb. vi. 11; αὐτῶν, Jn. vi. 7 [ἢ ΟἹ; τῶν σπερμάτων, 1 Co. xv. 38. εἷς ἕκαστος, every one (see εἷς, 4 b.): without a partit. gen., Acts xx. 31; Col. iv. 6; with a partit. gen., Lk. iv. 40; Acts ii. 3; xvil. 27; 1 Co. xii. 18, ete. €xaoros, when it denotes individually, every one of many, is often added appositively to nouns…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἕκαστος. P Fay 915 (A.D. 99) ἕκαστα ποιήσω καθὼς πρόκιται, 20. τοοῦ (A.D. 99) μετὰ κυρίων ἑκάστ[η]ς τοῦ ἀνδρός, “with their respective guardians their husbands” (Edd.), P Oxy X. 127874 (A.D. 214) ἕκαστον δὲ μέρος π[α]ραδοῦν[αι ἑϊκατέpw, ‘‘each party is to deliver to the other” (Edd.), 74. VI. 8861 (a magical formula—iii/a.p.) émlyp(aov) ἐν ἑκάστῳ τῶν φύλλων τὰ τῶν θεῶν ὀνόματα. The phrase καθ᾽ éxaστην ἡμέραν, as in Heb 315, is common, e.g. P Fay 130° (iii/A.D.), and similarly καθ᾽ ἕκαστον μῆνα, καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἔτος. For εἷς ἕκαστος, see P Tebt II. 3071 (A.D. 198) € ἐξεδό(θησαν) ἑνὶ ἑκάστῳ, “5 copies were issued, one to each one” (Edd.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἕκαστος (hekastos) — each.

ἕκαστος, η, ον,

each, opposed to the whole body, [Refs 8th c.BC+] they went home each to his own house,[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: singular in apposition with plural Noun or pronoun, which expresses the whole, Τρῶας δὲ τρόμος αἰνὸς ὑπήλυθε γυῖα ἕκαστον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἱ ἄλλαι πᾶσαι [τέχναι] τὸ αὑτῆς ἑκάστη ἔργον ἐργάζεται [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅστις ἕκαστος every one which.. (nisi to be read ὥς τις), [Refs 8th c.BC+]

2. the Article is sometimes added to the substantive (so regularly in earlier Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs] every single day, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also following the substantive, κατὰ τὸν οξπλίτην ἕκαστον [Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἕκαστος

hekastos

as if a superlative of hekas (afar); each or every:--any, both, each

(one), every (man, one, woman), particularly.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἕκαστος, η, ον

Adj

each, every one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἕκαστος hekastos 82x

each (one), every (one) separately, Mt. 16:27; Lk. 13:15

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἕκαστος ἕκαστος, η, ον every, every one, each, each one, Lat. quisque, Hom., etc.; the sg. is often joined with a pl. Verb, ἔβαν οἴκονδε ἕκαστος they went home every one of them, Il.; ἕκαστος ἐπίστασθε Xen.:—the sg. is also put in apposition with a pl. Noun, Τρῶας ἕκαστον ὑπήλυθε τρόμος (for Τρώων ἕκαστον) fear seized them every one, Il.

in pl. all and each one, Hom.

more definitely, εἷς ἕκαστος, Lat. unusquisque, every single one, Hdt., etc.:— καθ᾽ ἕκαστον singly, by itself, Lat. singulatim, Plat., etc.

ὡς ἕκαστοι each by himself, Hdt., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
85%each
each85% · 70×each one7% · 6×other renderings7% · 6×

82 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 8 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject49%indirect object22%adverbial20%object10%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 82 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
εἷςone
δέbut, on the otheκατάαὐτός
καίand, even, also, nam
πιστεύωI believe, have ἀποκαλύπτωI uncover, bringἔχωI have, hold, po
ἀποδίδωμιI give back, return,
τότεthenὅςἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
διαδίδωμιI offer here andεἷςoneἐπιθυμέωI long for, cove
ὅτιthat, since, because
οὗτοςοἶδαI know, remember
ἕκαστοςeach82×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
ἔργονwork, labor, actἴδιοςone’s own, privaἀδελφόςa brother
σύ
ὁArticle theἐπίλέγωI say, speak
κατά
ὁArticle the
αὐτός
ὁArticle theεἰςἐν
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
ὁArticle theμερίζωI divide, part, καλέωI call, invite,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἕκαστος · 82× in the New Testament
1 Corinthians Acts Revelation Ephesians Hebrews Luke Romans John Matthew 1 Peter 1 Thessalonians 2 Corinthians
Across the New Testament18 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 179 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 15c. AD 40

ἑκάστῃ δὲ τῶν ἡμερῶν ἀπένειμεν ἔνια τῶν τοῦ παντὸς τμημάτων τὴν πρώτην ὑπεξελόμενος, ἣν αὐτὸς οὐδὲ πρώτην, ἵνα μὴ ταῖς ἄλλαις συγκαταριθμῆται, καλεῖ, μίαν δ’ ὀνομάσας ὀνόματι εὐθυβόλῳ προσαγορεύει, τὴν μονάδος φύσιν καὶ πρόσρησιν ἐνιδών τε καὶ…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 2.8c. AD 100

ἀλλ̓ ἡ τοῦτο ἐνετειλάμην αὐτοῖς: ἕκαστος ὑμῶν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ ἑαυτοῦ κακίαν μὴ μνησικακείτω, καὶ ὅρκον ψευδῆ μὴ ἀγαπᾶτε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 6th c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Amh. 2 48Pathyris107 BC

οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὴν τοῖς ἰδίοις. ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῷ ἐν τῷ ὡρισμένῳ χρόνῳ ἀποτεισάτω ἑκάστου κεραμίου χαλκοῦ δραχμὰς χιλίας , ἡ δὲ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ναομσήσι ἐκ τοῦ Ψενθώτου καὶ

P.Amh. 2 50Pathyris107 BC

τάλαντα ε Β ἡμιόλιον καὶ τοῦ ὑπερπεσόντος χρόνου τόκους διδράχμους τῆς μνᾶς τὸν μῆνα ἕκαστον. ἔγγυοι ἀλλήλων εἰς ἔκτεισιν τῶν διὰ τοῦ δανείου τούτου πάντων αὐτοὶ οἱ δεδανεισμένοι, ἡ

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

ἀγορᾶι τιμήν, καὶ ἡ πρᾶξις ἔστω Ὥρῳ ἐκ τοῦ δεδανεισμένου καὶ ἐξ ἑνὸς καὶ ἑκάστου αὐτῶν καὶ ἐξ οὗ ἂν αἵρηται καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτῷ πάντων πράσσοντι καθάπερ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
τῶνho of the G3588 Article · genitive · plural · masculine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GPM — Article · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GPM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
ὁof the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
πυλώνωνpulōn gates G4440 Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
18× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A gate-way or porch is an entrance to a building or city, used in Matthew 26:71 and Acts 10:17 to describe where events took place.
Tyndale gloss
gate
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πυλών (i.e., *pulōn*) refers to a gateway or porch, often associated with the entrance of a house or palace. It is used in various contexts in the New Testament, including references to gates of cities and the vestibules of buildings. The term is built from the root related to 'gate' and is noted for its use in both secular and religious architecture.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πυλών, -ῶνος, ὁ

(< πύλη),

[in LXX chiefly for פֶּתַח, שַׁעַר;]

the porch or vestibule of a house or palace: Mt 26:71, Lk 16:20, Ac 10:17 12:13, 14.

The gate-way or gate-tower of a walled town: Ac 14:13, Re 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25 22:14.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πυλών, -Ovos, 6, (πύλη), [Aristot., Polyb., al.], Sept. often for Nd, sometimes for pw; 1. alarge gate: of a palace, Lk. xvi. 20; of a house, Acts x. 17; plur. (of the gates of a city), Acts xiv. 13; Rev. xxi. 12, 13, 15, 21, 25; xxii. 14. 2. the anterior part of a house, into which one enters through the gate, porch: Mt. xxvi. 71 (cf. 69 and 75); Acts xii. 14; hence ἡ θύρα τοῦ πυλῶνος, ib. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πυλών, “gateway ” of a house (Mt 267) or city (Ac 1414) : P Tebt Il. 331° (c. A.D. 131) ἐπῆλθοίν αἸὐὐθάδως els ἣν exw ἐν TH κώμῃ οἰκίαν. . ἐν τῶ πυλῶνι, ‘made a bold attack upon my house in the village . . at the gateway ᾿᾿ (Edd.), P Ryl II. 233° (ii/A.D.) κωμοκάτοικοί εἰσιν ot ἔζχο]ντες πρὸ Tod πυλῶνός σου τὸν ψιλὸν τόπον, ‘the owners of the open plot in front of your gateway are villagers,” and the illiterate P Oxy XII. 14898 (late iii/A.D.) τὸ κιθώνιν ἐπιλέλισμε (ἡ ἐπιλέλησμαι) παρὰ Τεκοῦσαν eis τὸν πυλῶνα, ‘I have left my cloak behind with Tecusa at the gateway” (Edd.). Psaltes Gr. p. 24 n.' has collected exx. of the late form πυλεών. For πύλιον see Preisigke 2098", 52557.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πυλών (pulōn) — gate.

πυλ-ών, ῶνος, ὁ,

gateway, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; frequently separated from the house or temple to which it gave entrance, gate-tower, gate-house, [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; of a temple, [Refs 1st c.AD+]; τετράθυρος π. [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; ἡ θύρα τοῦ π. [NT]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

πυλών

pulon

from 4439; a gate-way, door-way of a building or city; by implication,

a portal or vestibule:--gate, porch.

see GREEK for 4439

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πυλών, ῶνος, ὁ

n.m.

a large gate, a gateway, porch

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πυλών pylōn 18x

a gateway, vestibule, Mt. 26:71; Lk. 16:20; a gate, Acts 14:13; Rev. 21:12, 13, 15, 21, 25

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πυλών πυ^λών, ῶνος, ὁ, πύλη a gateway, gate-house, Polyb., etc.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GPM — Noun · genitive · plural · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GPM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Plural Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
Nave's Topical Bible

→ Of cities De 3:5; Jos 6:26; 1Sa 23:7; 2Sa 18:24; 2Ch 8:5

→ Made of iron Ac 12:10

→ Made of wood Ne 1:3

→ Made of brass Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

→ Double doors Isa 45:1; Eze 41:24

Torrey's New Topical Textbook

- Design of

Isa 62:10

- MADE OF

. Brass

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

. Iron

Ac 12:10

- Often two-leaved

Isa 45:1

- Fastened with bars of iron

Ps 107:16; Isa 45:2

- MADE TO

. Cities

1Ki 17:10

. Houses

Lu 16:20; Ac 12:14

. Temples

Ac 3:2

. Palaces

Es 5:13

. Prisons

Thompson Chain Reference topics

(1) Of Cities and Towns as places of Business

Ge 23:10; 34:20; De 16:18; 21:19; 22:15; Jos 20:4; Ru 4:1

2Sa 15:2; 1Ki 22:10; Pr 1:21; 22:22; Jer 14:2; Zec 8:16

(2) Punishment of Criminals outside of

De 17:5; Jer 20:2; Heb 13:12

(3) Of Jerusalem

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%gates
gates67% · 12×gate28% · 5×porch6% · 1×

18 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject39%adverbial33%object22%predicate6%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 18 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
ἐπίκαίand, even, also,εἰς
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ὑψηλόςhigh, lofty
ἀνατολήrising of the sun, t
ἀπό
βορρᾶςthe north wind, the
ἀπό
νότοςthe south wind, the
ἀπό
πυλώνgates18×
what comes after →
τρεῖςthree
καίand, even, also,
αὐτός
ἑλκόωI afflict with sκαίand, even, also,οὐNeg
δώδεκαIndec
καίand, even, also,μαργαρίτηςa pearl
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
αὐτός
προσέρχομαιI come near, consent
παιδίσκηa female slave,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπυλών · 18× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew
Across the New Testament4 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 11 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 3.40c. AD 40

ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις τοῦ θαλάμου ἐκτὸς μέν ἐστιν ὁ ἀνδρών, ἐντὸς δὲ ὁ αὐλών, καὶ ἡ αὔλειος ἐκτὸς μὲν τῆς αὐλῆς, εἴσω δὲ τοῦ πυλῶνος, οὕτως καὶ ἐπὶ ψυχῆς δύναται τὸ ἐκτός τινος ἐντὸς εἶναι [τοῦ] ἑτέρου.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.111c. AD 75–95

τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.

Clement of RomeFirst Clement 48.4c. AD 96

πολλῶν οὖν πυλῶν ἀνεῳγυιῶν ἡ ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ἐν Χριστῷ, ἐν ᾗ μακάριοι πάντες οἱ εἰσελθόντες καὶ κατευθύνοντες τὴν πορείαν αὐτῶν ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ, ἀταράχως πάντα ἐπιτελοῦντες.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 4th c. AD 3rd c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 10 1149Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 14

των τῶν πυλῶν ἐν αὐτῶι τῶι ἱερῶι ἰδιώτας γει… … αι βυσσουργούς τε καὶ ἀρτοκόπους καὶ ἕτερα

P.Mich. 5 226Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 37

κραταιοῦ θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγίστου θησαυρὸν ἐνεργὸν ἐν ὧι πύργος καὶ προσπαρακείμενος ἕτερος πύργος καὶ πυλών, ἡμῶν δὲ καὶ τῶν ἑτέρων ἡμῶν ἱερέων παραλαμβανόντων παρὰ τῶν προγεγραμμένων Ἀπύνχεως καὶ τῆς

P.Theon. 21OxyrhynchitesAD 160

Ἰουλίων Θέωνος καὶ Θέωνος τοῦ καὶ Τρύφωνος Δε … μ … … … … πυλῶνος ἱππῶνος τιμῆς ἐλαίου εἰς λύχνον πυλῶνος τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἱππῶνος ὑπὲρ Τῦβι κοτυλῶν β, ἐξ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἦνeimi was G1510 Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
2,457× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
To be or exist, a basic verb used to describe something or someone, like God saying 'I am' in John 8:58.
Tyndale gloss
to be
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἰμί is a Greek verb meaning 'to be' or 'to exist.' It serves various functions, such as a substantive verb for persons and things, and as a copula linking subjects and predicates. The New Testament frequently uses it in passages like John 1:1 and Matthew 24:3. Notably, it can also express possibility, as seen in Hebrews 9:5.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἰμί,

with various uses and significations, like the English verb to be.

As substantive verb.

Of persons and things, to be, exist: Ac 17:28, Jo 1:1 8:58 17:5, al; ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν (for past ptcp.), Re 1:4, 8 4:8 11:17 16:5 (v. Swete, Ap., 5; M, Pr., 228); τὰ (μὴ) ὄντα, Ro 4:17, I Co 1:28.

Of times, events, etc., to be, happen, take place: Mt 24:3, Mk 14:2 15:42, Lk 21:23, Jo 4:6, 23 5:10, al.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰμί (fr. ἔω, whence ἐμέ in inscriptions [7]; Aeol. ἐμμὲ (Curtius (yet ἔμμε, so G. Meyer) 8 564; Veitch p. 2287), impv. ἴσθι, ἔστω, less usual ἤτω, 1 Co. xvi. 22; Jas. v.12; Clem. Rom. 1 Cor. 48,5; [1 Mace. x. 31; Ps. ciii. (civ.) 31]; Plat. rep. 2 p. 361 ¢. [here it has given place to ἔστω (or ἴτω), see Stallb. ad loc.; Veitch p. 200 sq.; 3 pers. plur. ἔστωσαν, Lk. xii. 35; 1 Tim. iii. 12], inf. εἶναι ; impf. —ace. to the more ancient and elegant form, ἦν, 2 pers. ἦσθα (Mt. xxvi. 69; Mk. xiv. 67), rarer form ἧς (Mt. RKV. 1235 dn ΧΙ: 9]. 92); xxI LS. Reyna 15 G@ ΕΣ Tr WH), 3 pers. ἦν, 1 pers. plur. jer, — ace. to the mid. form, com. in later Grk. [ef. Veitch p. 226], ἤμην (Mt. xxv. 35sq.; [on Acts xi. 11 ef. WH. Intr. § 404]; Gal.i.10, etc.), plur. ἤμεθα (Mt. xxiii. 30 G L T Tr WH; Acts xxvii. 37 L T Tr WH; [Gal. iv. 3 TWH Tr mrg.; Eph. ii. 3 T Tr WH; Bar. i. 19]); cf. Lob. ad Phryn.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰμί. Middle forms in the flexion of εἰμί other than the present tense (cf. however MGr εἶμαι, -σαι, etc.) begin to appear very early in the dialects and are well established in the papyri. Thus the Ist sing. impf. ἤμην, which always takes the place of the class. ἢ in the NT (but see Ac 2018 D) may be illustrated from PSI IV. 36274 (B.c. 251-0) ἤμην δὲ πρὸς τῶι λαμβάνειν τὸν χαλκόν, P Magd 65 (B.c. 221) ἤμην γυμνός, P Par 57 (B.c. 129) ὧν ἤμην δι᾽ αὐτῶν [π]αραμε[μετ]ρηκ[υῖα, P Oxy IIT. 526% (ii/A.p.) οὐκ ἤμην ἀπαθὴς ἀλόγως σε καταλείπιν. For ist plur. ἤμεθα see P Petr IT. 4 (7)° (B.C. 255-4) τεθλιμμένοι ἤμεθα : cf. Ac 2737, Eph 23, as contrasted with the act. ἦμεν in Ac 111 (NB), 1612, Rom 7° a/.: the two forms are found together in Gal 4% (SDFG). The non-classical ἧς (Lob. Phryx. p. 149) is found sefzes in the NT as compared with ἦσθα (from an old perf. form ἤησθα), which is confined…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἰμί (eimi) — to be.

εἰμί

(sum), Aeolic dialect ἔμμι [Refs 7th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect ἠμί [Refs]; 2nd pers. singular εἶ, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰς [Refs 8th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Doric dialect ἐσσί [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἐστί, Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. dual ἐστόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural ἐσμέν, Epic dialect and Ionic dialect εἰμέν (also in [Refs 5th c.BC+], Doric dialect εἰμές [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural εἰσί (-ίν), Epic dialect and Ionic dialect ἔασι (-ιν) [Refs 8th c.BC+], Doric dialect ἐντί [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect and Lyric poetry also in middle form ἔσσο [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔστω (ἤτω [LXX+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἔστωσαν, but ἔστων [Refs 8th c.BC+], and early Attic dialect Inscrr., [Refs 2nd c.BC+]subjunctive ὦ, ᾖς, ᾖ, Epic dialect ἔω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular ἔῃ [Refs…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἰμί

eimi

the first person singular present indicative; a prolonged form of a

primary and defective verb; I exist (used only when emphatic):--am,

have been, X it is I, was. See also 1488, 1498, 1511, 1527, 2258,

2071, 2070, 2075, 2076, 2771, 2468, 5600.

see GREEK for 1488

see GREEK for 1498

see GREEK for 1511

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 2258

see GREEK for 2071

see GREEK for 2070

see GREEK for 2075

see GREEK for 2076

see GREEK for 2771

see GREEK for 2468

see GREEK for 5600

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἰμί

v.

I am, exist

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἰμί eimi 2x

to be, to exist, Jn. 1:1; 17:5; Mt. 6:30; Lk. 4:25, freq.; ἐστί[ν], it is possible, proper, Heb. 9:5; a simple linking verb (“copula”) to the subject and predicate, and therefore in itself affecting the force of the sentence only by its tense, mood, etc., Jn. 1:1; 15:1, freq.; it also forms a frequent circumlocution with the participles of the present and perfect of other verbs, Mt. 19:22; Mk. 2:6

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

εἰμί The whole of the pres. ind. (except 2nd sg. εἶ) may be enclitic when εἰμί is the Copula; but the 3rd sg. is written ἔστι in certain cases of emphasis, e. g. ἔστι μοι, I have: when used as Verb Subst., it retains the accent in all persons. as Substantive Verb, to be, to exist, οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὐδ᾽ ἔσσεται Od.; τεθνηῶτος, μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος id. Od.; οὐκέτ᾽ ἔστι he is no more, Eur.; θεοὶ αἰὲν ἐόντες Il.; ἐσσόμενοι posterity, id. Il.; ζώντων καὶ ὄντων Ἀθηναίων Dem.:—so of cities, etc., ὄλωλεν, οὐδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἔστι Τροία (cf. Troja fuit), Eur.

of things, to be, exist, εἰ ἔστιν ἀληθέως [ἡ τράπεζα] Hdt.; ἕως ἂν ὁ πόλεμος ἦι so long as it last, Thuc.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Verb-IAI-3S — Verb · imperfect · active · indicative · third person · singular
imperfect active indicative — a continuing action in past time.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

V-IAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Imperfect Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
26%is
is26% · 619×are9% · 228×was7% · 176×being6% · 138×it is5% · 112×will be4% · 87×am3% · 80×were3% · 67×other renderings37% · 901×

2,408 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 139 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
linking verb87%verb13%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,457 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
οὐNeg
ὅτιthat, since, becκαίand, even, also,ὅς
οὗτος
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,
ὅς
ἐνἄνθρωποςa man, one of thθεόςGod, a god
ἐγώ
ὅτιthat, since, becλέγωI say, speakμετά
σύ
ἐνλέγωI say, speakαὐτός
εἰμίwas2457×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
υἱόςa son, descendenΧριστόςanointed, the Meβασιλείαkingship, sovere
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁArticle theοὐNegγάρfor
ἐν
ὁArticle theσύαὐτός
δέbut, on the other ha
ὁArticle theτὶςἐκεῖthere, yonder, t
ἐγώ
εἰςἄξιοςworthy, worthy oὧδεhere

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἰμί · 2,457× in the New Testament
John Luke Matthew Acts Mark 1 Corinthians Romans Revelation 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews Galatians

67 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The company it keepswords that stand beside it more often than chance
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Ignatius of Antioch Clement of Rome
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.2c. AD 75–95

τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 4th c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Ἐπεὶφ κε. ἐν Παθύρει, ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν, μηνὸς Τῦβι ιη ἐν Παθύρει ἐφʼ Ἑρμίου τοῦ παρὰ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου. ἀπέδοτο

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἐξek of G1537 Preposition
913× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The preposition 'out from' shows movement or origin, like in John 6:31 and Acts 9:3. It helps us understand where people or things come from or are going.
Tyndale gloss
out from
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ἐκ (transliterated as ek) is a preposition that means 'from' or 'out of,' governing the genitive case. It indicates origin, separation, or motion away from a place, time, or cause. In the New Testament, it is used to denote various relationships, such as source or distinction, and appears in contexts like John 6:31 and Matthew 1:3. Different lexicons highlight its versatility in both literal and metaphorical senses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ἐκ (ἐξ),

prep. c. gen.,

from out of, from (see Addendum, p. 492).

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ,

prep. c. gen.,

of motion outwards, separation from (opp. to εἰς; = Lat. e, ex), from out of, from among, from.

Of Place,

of motion, out of, forth from, off from: Jo 6:31, Ac 9:3, Ga 1:8, al.; esp. after verbs of motion, Mt 8:28 17:9, Mk 1:25 7:28, Jo 1:33 20:1, Ac 12:7, 17 27:30, al.; constr. praeg., σώζειν (διας.) ἐκ, Ju 5, Ac 28:4. Metaph., Mt 7:4, 5, I Pe 2:9; ἐκ τ.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ἐκ, before a vowel ἐξ, a preposition governing the genitive. It denotes as well exit or emission out of, as separation from, something with which there has been close connection ; opp. to the prepositions εἰς into and ἐν in: from out of, out from, forth from, from, (Lat. e, ex), [ οἵ. W. 364, 366 (343) sq.; B. 326 sq. (281)]. It is used I. of Pace, and 1. univ. of the place from which; from a surrounding or enclosing place, from the interior of: ἄρτος, ἄγγελος, φῶς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, Jn. vi. 81 sq.; Acts ix. 3 [here RG ἀπό]; Gal. 1. 8; ἀνατολή, δύναμις ἐξ ὕψους, Lk. i. 78; xxiv. 49; esp. after verbs of going, fleeing, leading, calling, freeing, removing, releasing, etc. : ἥκειν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας eis τ. Γαλιλαίαν, Jn. iv. 47; ἐξέρχεσθαι ἔκ τινος out of the body of one (spoken of demons), Mk. i. 25; v. 8 [here L mrg. ἀπό]; vii. 29; of power emanating from the body, Mk. v. 30 [cf. B. 301 (258)…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ἐκ 190 passages as P Tebt I. 23" (c. B.C. 119 or 114) οὐκ ὀρθῶς κρίνομεν πέπρακταί σοι μὴ ἐκ τῆς ἡμῶν προεδρίας πεφροντικέναι ἀπροσδέητον ἑτέρων γενέσθαι, ‘I consider that you have acted badly in not having been careful that he should be independent of others owing to my superior rank ”’ (Edd. ), 24. 248° (B.c. 117) ἔκ τε τῆς πλείστης προσεδρείας, ‘on account of the prolonged attendance ’’ (Edd.), and P Fay 12} (c. B.C. 103) ἐκ κοινολογ[ς(]α[ς] τ[ἢ]ς συνσταθείσης πρὸς αὐτούς, ‘‘as the result of the colloquy which took place between τ᾿ (Edd.). From this it is an easy transition to the meaning ‘‘ according to”’ or “in accordance with,’’ as in the common legal phrase καθάπερ ἐγ δίκης, ‘‘as if in accordance with a legal decision,’’ z. δ. ‘‘as if a formal decree of the court had been obtained,’’ as in P Eleph 1132 (B.C. 311-0) (= Selections, p- 3), P Ryl 11. 15435 (a.p. 66): cf. P Petr III.…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ἐκ (ek) — out from.

ἐκ,

before a vowel ἐξ, also

__A ἐξ τῳ ϝοίκῳ [Refs] and less frequently ; ἐγ- in Inscrr. before β γ δ λ μ ; Cretan dialect and Boeotian dialect ἐς [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἐχ frequently in Attic dialect Inscrr. before χ φ θ (and in early Inscrr. before ς, [Refs]:—preposition governing GEN. only (except in [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—radical sense, from out of, frequently also simply, from.

__A.I OF PLACE, the most frequently usage, variously modified:

__A.I.1 of Motion, out of, forth from, ἐκ Πύλου ἐλθὼν τηλόθεν ἐξ ἀπίης γαίης [Refs 8th c.BC+] to strike with a spear in the hand, opposed to ἀντιτοξεύειν or ἀκοντίζειν, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἐκ χρυσῶν φιαλῶν πίνειν[Refs 5th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ἐκ

ek

or ex ex

a primary preposition denoting origin (the point whence action or

motion proceeds), from, out (of place, time, or cause; literal or

figurative; direct or remote):--after, among, X are, at,

betwixt(-yond), by (the means of), exceedingly, (+ abundantly above),

for(- th), from (among, forth, up), + grudgingly, + heartily, X

heavenly, X hereby, + very highly, in, ...ly, (because, by reason) of,

off (from), on, out among (from, of), over, since, X thenceforth,

through,

X unto, X vehemently, with(-out). Often used in composition,

with the same general import; often of completion.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ἐκ, ἐξ

Prep.

from out, out from among, from

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ἐκ ek 915x

ἐχ before vowels, with genitive, from, out of, a place, Mt. 2:15; 3:17; of, from, out of, denoting origin or source, Mt. 1:3; 21:19; of, from some material, Mt. 3:9; Rom. 9:21; of, from, among, partitively, Mt. 6:27; 21:31; Mk. 9:17; from, denoting cause, Rev. 8:11; 17:6; means or instrument, Mt. 12:33, 37; by, through, denoting the author or efficient cause, Mt. 1:18; Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ἐκ

ἐξ before a vowel, ἐγ before β γ δ λ μ prep. governing GEN. only, Lat. e, exRadical sense, from out of, opp. to εἰς:

out of, from. c. gen.

OF PLACE:

of Motion, out of, forth from, Hom., etc.: ἐκ θυμοῦ φίλεον I loved her from my heart, with all my heart, Il.

to denote change from one place or condition to another, κακὸν ἐκ κακοῦ one evil from (or after) another, id. Il.; λόγον ἐκ λόγου λέγειν Dem.

to express distinction from a number, ἐκ πόλεων πίσυρες four out of many, Il.

of Position, like ἔξω, outside of, beyond, ἐκ βελέων out of shot, id. Il.; ἐκ καπνοῦ out of the smoke, Od.

with Verbs of Rest, ἐκ ποταμοῦ χρόα νίζετο washed his body with water from the river, id. Od.:—with Verbs signifying to hang or fasten, ἐκ πασσαλόφι κρέμασεν φόρμιγγα he hung his lyre from (i. e. on) the peg, id.…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Prep — Preposition
preposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

PREP PREPosition

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
28%of
of28% · 258×from26% · 243×out of23% · 216×out from7% · 61×by5% · 51×at2% · 20×other renderings8% · 70×other renderings1% · 14×

933 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 26 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial69%predicate15%subject11%object5%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 913 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becἀνάστασιςa rising again,
αὐτός
ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, ἀνίστημιI raise up, set καταβαίνωI go down, come
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςσύἐγώ
εἰμίI am, exist
οὐNegὁArticle theτίςIrg
εἷςone
καίand, even, also,ὅτιthat, since, becαὐτός
ἐκof913×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
οὐρανόςthe sky, the heaθεόςGod, a godστόμαthe mouth, speec
αὐτός
εἰμίI am, existὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,
νεκρόςdead, a corpse
ἀνίστημιI raise up, set ἐγείρωI wake, arouse, καίand, even, also,
σύ
παραδίδωμιI hand over, delμεριμνάωI am anxious, diἄνθρωποςa man, one of th
πίστιςfaith, belief, trust
ζάωI liveἸησοῦςJesusἀλλάbut, except

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceἐκ · 913× in the New Testament
John Revelation Luke Acts Matthew Mark Romans Galatians 1 Corinthians 1 John 2 Corinthians Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἑνὸςehis one G1520 Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
336× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for one, used to describe unity or agreement, as seen in John 10:30 and Romans 12:4-5. It emphasizes oneness and togetherness. This concept is key in Christian teachings.
Tyndale gloss
one
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

εἷς is a cardinal numeral meaning 'one.' It contrasts with many and can function as a noun or adjective. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as emphasizing unity (e.g., John 10:30) or indicating exclusivity (e.g., Matthew 27:14). The entries note its use in phrases like 'one by one' and as an ordinal meaning 'first.'

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

εἷς, μιά, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός,

cardinal numeral, one;

one, as opp. to many: Mt 25:15, Ro 5:12, I Co 10:8, al.; as subst., Ro 5:15, Eph 2:14; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 5:19, al.; seq. ἐκ (ἐξ), Mk 14:18, Jo 6:8, al.; metaph., of union and concord, Jo 10:30 17:11, Ro 12:4, 5, Phl 1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Lk 14:18; c. neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

εἷς (ehis) — one.

εἷς, μίᾰ, ἕν

(μίη only in late Ionic dialect Prose): genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός:—Epic dialect ἕεις [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect ἧς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Ionic dialect feminine ἴᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter dative (ἰῷ κίον ἤματι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Orig. ἕνς, assim. ἔν (δ) probably in [Refs] Indo-European sem-(compare ὁμός); μία from sm-ί; ἴα is not related to μία, but probably to pronominal stem i-(Latin is), compareἰός.)

1. as a Numeral, εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; strengthened, εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, a single

__A one, one alone,[Refs 8th c.BC+]

__b emphatically with a superlative, εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἷς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

εἷς

heis

(including the neuter (etc.) hen); a primary numeral; one:--a(-n, -ny,

certain), + abundantly, man, one (another), only, other, some. See

also 1527, 3367, 3391, 3762.

see GREEK for 1527

see GREEK for 3367

see GREEK for 3391

see GREEK for 3762

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

εἷς, μία, ἕν

Adj

one

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

εἱς heis 345x

numeral one, Mt. 10:29, freq.; only, Mk. 12:6; one virtually by union, Mt. 19:5, 6; Jn. 10:30; one and the same, Lk. 12:52; Rom. 3:30; one in respect of office and standing, 1 Cor. 3:8; equivalent to τις, a certain one, Mt. 8:19; 16:14; a, an, Mt. 21:19; Jas. 4:13; εἱς ἕκαστος, each one, every one, Read the full entry →

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-GSM — Adjective · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-GSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

wun.

See NUMBER.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
93%one
one93% · 334×other renderings5% · 19×other renderings2% · 6×

359 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject32%adverbial24%object20%predicate20%indirect object2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 336 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
ὁArticle theγάρforδέbut, on the othe
καίand, even, also, nam
δεξιόςon the right hanπαραλαμβάνωI take, receiveπωλέωI sell
ἐν
γίνομαιI come into beinδέbut, on the otheγάρfor
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakπροσέρχομαιI come near, conἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ὅτιthat, since, because
σύδέbut, on the otheλέγωI say, speak
εἷςone336×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
δώδεκαIndecμικρόςlittle, smallθεόςGod, a god
ἐκ
ὁArticle theαὐτόςδεξιόςon the right han
ἕκαστοςeach, every one
αὐτόςὁArticle theκατά
εἰμίI am, exist
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐκ
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁArticle theΜωϋσῆςMosesἨλίαςElijah

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceεἷς · 336× in the New Testament
Matthew Luke John Mark 1 Corinthians Revelation Acts Romans Ephesians Galatians 1 Timothy Hebrews

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament21 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 444 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 9c. AD 40

τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.2c. AD 100

Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD 4th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ

P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν μζ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα χαλκοῦ ταλάντου ἑνός . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην Πετεσοῦχος ὁ ἀποδόμενος ὃν ἐδέξατο

BGU 3 999Pathyris100 BC

καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
μαργαρίτου.¶margaritēs pearl. G3135 Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
9× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
A margarites is a pearl, a valuable gemstone. Jesus uses it in a parable in Matthew 13:45-46 to describe something very precious.
Tyndale gloss
pearl
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word μαργαρίτης, transliterated as margaritēs, means 'a pearl.' It appears in several New Testament passages, including Matthew and Revelation, often symbolizing something precious. The word is derived from margaros, referring to a pearl oyster, and is used proverbially in Matthew 7:6 to describe the act of sharing sacred teachings with those unworthy of them.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

* μαργαρίτης, -ου, ὁ,

a pearl: Mt 13:45, 46, I Ti 2:9, Re 17:4 18:12, 16 21:21 (-ῖται, WH); proverbially, Mt 7:6.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

μαργαρίτης, -ov, 6, a pearl: Mt. xiii. 45 sq.; 1 Tim. ii. 9; Rev. xvii. 4; xviii. [12], 16; xxi. 21 [hereL TWH accent -pira, RG Tr -pira (cf. ΤᾺ Proleg. p. 101)]; τοὺς μαργαρίτας βάλλειν ἔμπρυσθεν χοίρων, a proverb, i. 6. to thrust the most sacred and precious teachings of the gospel upon the most wicked and abandoned men (incompetent as they are, through their hostility to the gospel, to receive them), and thus to profane them, Mt. vii. 6 (cf. Prov. iii. 15 sq.; Job xxviii. 18 sq.).

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

μαργαρίτης (margaritēs) — pearl.

μαργᾰρ-ίτης [ῑ], ου, ὁ,

pearl, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: -ῖτις λίθος, ἡ, Androsth. cited in [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; -ῖτις alone, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; -ίς alone, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

II. -ίτης χερσαῖος, an unidentified precious stone, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

μαργαρίτης

margarites

from margaros (a pearl-oyster); a pearl:--pearl.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

μαργαρίτης, ου, ὁ

n.m.

a pearl

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

μαργαρίτης margaritēs 9x

a pearl, Mt. 7:6; 13:45, 46; 1 Tim. 2:9; Rev. 17:4; 18:12, 16; 21:21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

μαργαρίτης μαργα^ρί_της, ου, ὁ, a pearl, Theophr., etc.

A Persian word.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSM — Noun · genitive · singular · masculine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

purl.

See STONES, PRECIOUS.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Pearl

(Heb. gabish, Job 28:18; Gr. margarites, Matt. 7:6; 13:46; Rev. 21:21). The pearl oyster is found in the Persian Gulf and the Red Sea. Its shell is the “mother of pearl,” which is of great value for ornamental purposes (1 Tim. 2:9; Rev. 17:4). Each shell contains eight or ten pearls of various sizes.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

(Heb. gabish). The Hebrew word in (Job 28:18) probably means "crystal." Pearls, however are frequently mentioned in the New Testament, (Matthew 13:45; 1 Timothy 2:9; Revelation 17:4; 21:21) and were considered by the ancients among the most precious of gems, and were highly esteemed as ornaments. The kingdom of heaven is compared to a "pearl of great price." In (Matthew 7:6) pearls are used metaphorically for anything of value, or perhaps more especially for "wise sayings." (The finest specimens of the pearl are yielded by the pearl oyster (Avicula margaritifera), still found in abundance in the Persian Gulf and near the…

Nave's Topical Bible

→ General scriptures concerning Job 28:18; Re 17:4; 18:12,16

→ “Pearl of great price,” Mt 13:46

→ Ornaments made of 1Ti 2:9

→ FIGURATIVE Mt 7:6

→ SYMBOLICAL Re 21:21

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
67%pearls
pearls67% · 6×pearl22% · 2×pearl!11% · 1×

9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
object44%adverbial33%predicate22%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
τίμιοςof great price,
ὁArticle the
βάλλωI cast, throw, r
καλόςbeautiful, good, wor
ζητέωI seek, search f
πολύτιμοςof great value
εἷςone
ἤDisj
χρυσίονa golden ornamen
μαργαρίτηςpearl.9×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
βύσσινοςof fine linen, cὁArticle the
σύ
ἔμπροσθεν
ἀπέρχομαιI come or go away fr
πιπράσκωI sell
ἤDisj
ἱματισμόςraiment, clothin
ἔχωI have, hold, posses
ποτήριονa drinking cup

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceμαργαρίτης · 9× in the New Testament
Revelation Matthew 1 Timothy
Across the New Testament3 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Ignatius of Antioch
Ignatius of AntiochThe Letters of Ignatius 1.11.2c. AD 110

χωρὶς τούτου μηδὲν ὑμῖν πρεπέτω, ἐν ᾧ τὰ δεσμὰ περιφέρω, τοὺς πνευματικοὺς μαργαρίτας, ἐν οἷς γένοιτό μοι ἀναστῆναι τῆ προσευχῇ ὑμῶν, ἦς γένοιτό μοι ἀεὶ μέτοχον εἶναι, ἵνα ἐν κλήρῳ Ἐφεσίων εὑρεθῶ τῶν Χριστιανῶν, οἳ καὶ τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πάντοτε…

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
5th c. AD 6th c. AD 7th c. AD
PSI 15 1568OxyrhynchosAD 401–AD 600

χμγ Μηνᾶς Ἰακὼβ γεωργῷ ἀπὸ Ὤφεως· κατέβαλες ἐπὶ Μαργαρίτην τὸν παῖδα ἐπὶ μηνὸς Ἁθὺρ τετάρτης ἰνδικτίονος νομίσματα πέντε, οὕτως· ὑπὲρ μὲν

CPR 8 56Herakleopolites (?)AD 401–AD 600

Ἰωάννῃ ἀδελφῷ σίτου ἀρτάβαι … δ Ἀγάθῳ ἀδελφῷ σίτου ἀρτάβαι ϛ φακοῦ ἀρτάβαι … Μαργαρίτῃ Ἀλεξανδρῖ πατρὶ αὐτῶν σίτου ἀρτάβαι θ φακοῦ ἀρτάβαι … Ἰωάννῃ ἄπα Ὧλ σίτου ἀρτάβαι

τὸ δὲ ναῦλον κελεύσῃ δοῦναι ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ὅσον ἂν θε … τὸν αὐτὸν οὖν μαργαρίτην κέλευσον πεμφθῆναι μετὰ τῶν σκευῶν ἐνταῦθα ἵνα καὶ παραδῶ αὐτά, εἰ καί, ὅτι ζῇ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
Καὶkai and G2532 Conjunction
8,978× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
And or also, a connecting word used to join ideas or words, like in Matthew 2:18 and Hebrews 1:1.
Tyndale gloss
and
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καί,

conj.,

and.

Copulative.

Connecting single words;

in general: Mt 2:18 16:1, Mk 2:15, Lk 8:15, He 1:1, al. mult.; repeated before each of the terms in a series, Mt 23:23, Lk 14:21, Ro 7:12 9:4, al.;

connecting numerals (WM, § 37, 4): Jo 2:20, Ac 13:20;

joining terms which are not mutually exclusive, as the part with the whole: Mt 8:33 26:59, Mk 16:17,

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καί (kai) — and.

καί,

conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,

__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,

__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καί

kai

apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also

a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in

connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,

also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,

yet.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καί

Cj.

and, even, also, namely

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καί kai 9x

(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Conj — Conjunction
conjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
89%and
and89% · 8448×also8% · 714×other renderings2% · 191×other renderings1% · 124×

9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial16%subject13%object10%predicate3%verb2%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
ἐνἐπίπρός
σύ
χάριςgrace, favor, kiπρόςπατήρfather, Father,
ἐγώ
πατήρfather, Father, πρόςθεόςGod, a god
εἰμίI am, exist
αὐτόςὁArticle theἐγώ
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theθέλημαwill, wish, desiδέbut, on the othe
καίand8978×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
ἀδελφόςa brotherπατήρfather, Father, μήτηρa mother
λέγωI say, speak
αὐτόςὁArticle theπρός
οὐNeg
εἰμίI am, existμήNegδύναμαιI am powerful, a
ὁράωI see, look upon, ex
ὁArticle theαὐτόςἀνήρa male human bei
ἐν
ὁArticle theπᾶςall, the whole, ὅλοςall, the whole,

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαί · 8,978× in the New Testament
Luke Matthew Revelation Acts Mark John 1 Corinthians Romans Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ἡho the G3588 Article · nominative · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-NSF — Article · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-NSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.

1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.

This he calls the preaching of the cross.

2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.

3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.

Th' adorning thee with so much art,

Is but a barb'rous skill.

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
ὁthe19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
πλατεῖαplateia street G4116 Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
1× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Meaning
This word means broad or wide, like a wide street. It appears in Matthew 7:13, where Jesus talks about the broad way to destruction. The Bible also uses it to describe a wide road.
Tyndale gloss
street
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word πλατύς (*platys*) means 'broad' or 'wide.' It is used as an adjective and can also refer to a street or public square, as seen in several New Testament verses like Matthew 7:13. The word is derived from a root meaning 'to spread out' and has various applications in literature, including descriptions of physical dimensions and metaphorical uses.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πλατύς, -εῖα, -ύ,

[in LXX for רָחָב;]

broad: Mt 7:13. As subst., ἡ π. (sc. ὁδός), [in LXX chiefly for רְחֹב;] a street: Mt 6:5 12:19(LXX), Mk 6:56, WH, mg., Lk 10:10 13:26 14:21, Ac 5:15, Re 11:8 21:21 22:2.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πλατύς, -εἴα, -ὐ, [cf. Lat. planus, latus ; Curtius § 867 b; Vaniéek p. 552], fr. Hom. down, Sept. several times for am), broad : Mt. vii. 13.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πλατύς, “broad.” In P Par 10!% (B.c. 145) a reward is offered for a fugitive slave who is described as μεγέθει βραχύς, πλατὺς ἀπὸ τῶν Spwv. Cf. P Fay 11527 (A.D. IOI) a strap στερῆν (1 στερεὸν) kal πλατύ, “strong and broad,” P Flor III. 333% (ii/A.D.) μέχρι πλατείας πύλης, and P Ryl II. 169!° (A.D. 196-7) πλατέων ἄρτων, ‘flat loaves.” In P Lond 880? (B.c. 113) (= III. p. 9) we should read, according to P Strass II. 8523 note, πλατεῖα ὁδὸς τῶν θεῶν : cf. Mt 74%. This prepares us for the use of πλατεῖα as a subst. with or without any special name of the ‘‘street” attached, e.g. P Oxy I. 5145 (A.D. 173) ” or ‘* public square

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πλατύς (platus) — street.

πλᾰτύς, εῖα, ύ,

Ionic dialect feminine πλατέα [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—wide, broad, τελαμών [Refs 8th c.BC+]; αἰπόλια πλατέ᾽ αἰγῶν broad herds, i.e. large or spread over a wide space,[Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly, π. ὁδὸς τῶν θεῶν [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. flat, level, χῶρος π. καὶ πολλός [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κάρυα τὰ π., i.e. chestnuts, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; σελάχη, ἰχθύες, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

3. of a man, broad-shouldered, οὐ γὰρ οἱ πλατεῖς, οὐδ᾽ εὐρύνωτοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. of seasons, far advanced, ἔαρ Procl.ad [Refs 8th c.BC+]

5. metaphorically, π. ὅρκος a broad strong oath, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατάγελως π. flat (i.e. downright) mockery, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; π. φλήναφος Amelius cited…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πλατύς

platus

from 4111; spread out "flat" ("plot"), i.e. broad:--wide.

see GREEK for 4111

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πλατύς, εῖα, ύ

Adj

broad

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πλατύς platys 1x

broad, wide, Mt. 7:13*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πλατύς πλα^τύς, εῖα, ύ, ionic fem. πλατέα: — wide, broad, Il.; αἰπόλια πλατέ᾽ αἰγῶν broad herds, i. e. large or widespread, Hom.; π. πρόσοδοι Pind.

flat, level, Hdt., Plat.; κάρυα τὰ πλατέα, i. e. chestnuts, Xen.

of a man, broad-shouldered, Soph.

metaph., πλατὺς κατάγελως flat (i. e. downright) mockery, Ar.: neut. as adv., flatly, merely, id. Ar.

πλατεῖα (sc. ὁδός), a street, Lat. platea, Xen.:—(sub. χείρ), the flat of the hand, Ar.

salt, brackish, Hdt.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSF — Noun · nominative · singular · feminine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

stret.

See CITY.

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Street

The street called “Straight” at Damascus (Acts 9:11) is “a long broad street, running from east to west, about a mile in length, and forming the principal thoroughfare in the city.” In Oriental towns streets are usually narrow and irregular and filthy (Ps. 18:42; Isa. 10:6). “It is remarkable,” says Porter, “that all the important cities of Palestine and Syria Samaria, Caesarea, Gerasa, Bozrah, Damascus, Palmyra, had their ‘straight streets’ running through the centre of the city, and lined with stately rows of columns. The most perfect now remaining are those of Palmyra and Gerasa, where long ranges of the columns still stand.”, Through Samaria, etc.

Smith's Bible Dictionary

The streets of a modern Oriental town present a great contrast to those with which we are familiar, being generally narrow, tortuous and gloomy, even in the best towns. Their character is mainly fixed by the climate and the style of architecture, the narrowness being due to the extreme heat, and the gloominess to the circumstance of the windows looking for the most part into the inner court. The street called "Straight," in Damascus, (Acts 9:11) was an exception to the rule of narrowness: it was a noble thoroughfare, one hundred feet wide. divided in the Roman age by colonnades into three avenues, the central one for foot passengers, the side passages for vehicles and horsemen going in different directions. The shops and warehouses were probably collected together into bazaars in ancient as in modern times. (

Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 31 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus
JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 15.337c. AD 75–95

ψαλίδες δὲ ἐμπεποίηνται συνεχεῖς καταγωγαὶ τοῖς ναυτίλοις, τὸ δὲ πρὸ αὐτῶν ἀπόβασις πλατεῖα κύκλῳ περιεστεφάνωκεν τὸν πάντα λιμένα, περίπατος τοῖς ἐθέλουσιν ἥδιστος.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 1st c. BC 2nd c. BC
P.Mich. 5 244Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 43

τῶν δημοσίων λαογραφίας ἢ καὶ δαπανῶν ἐξεῖναι τῷ Κρονίωνι ἐνεχυράζειν αὐτοὺς ἔν τε τῆι πλατείᾳ καὶ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις καὶ παραδιδόναι αὐτοὺς ἢ σώματα αὐτῶν· ἐφʼ ὧι δὲ οἱ

CdÉ 12 (1937), p. 281-Tebtynis (Arsinoites)AD 47

ἢ καὶ τῶν προσενκληθησομένων αὐτοῖς ἐξεῖναι τῷ αὐτῷ Ἀπύνχι ἐνεχυράζειν αὐτοὺς ἔν τε τῇ πλατείᾳ καὶ ἐν ταῖς οἰκίαις καὶ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῶι καὶ παραδιδόναι αὐτοὺς καθὼς πρόκιται.

P.Ryl. 2 155Soknopaiu Nesos (ArsinoitesAD 138–AD 161

παστοφορίων ἐντὸς περιβόλου ἱεροῦ, ὧν γείτονες τῆς μὲν … … … οἰκίας νότου δημοσία πλατεῖα βορρᾶ Γαλλίωνος οἰκία ἀπηλιώτου Βελλῆτος Κάστορος … λιβὸς ῥύμη βασιλική, καὶ τῆς πατρικῆς οἰκίας

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
τῆςho of the G3588 Article · genitive · singular · feminine
19,783× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
about as common in Revelation as anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
The Greek word for 'the' or 'this', used to point out a specific person or thing, like in Acts 17:28. It can also mean 'he', 'she', or 'it'.
Tyndale gloss
the/this/who
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὁ, ἡ, τό,

the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.

As demonstr. pron.

As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).

Distributive, ὁ μὲν . . . ὁ δέ, the one . . . the other: I Co 7:7, Ga 4:22; pl., Ac 14:4, 17:32, Phl 1:16, al.; οἱ μὲν . . . ἄλλοι δέ, Mt 16:14, Jo 7:12; οἱ μεν̀ . . . ὁ δέ, He 7:21, 23.

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.

ὁ,

ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,

__A demonstrative Pronoun.

__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.

__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὁ ἡ τό

ho

he hay, and the neuter

to to

in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be

supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,

he, she, it, etc.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὁ, ἡ, τό

Article

the

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὁ ho 19x

the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὁ the, that

ὁ, ἡ, τό, is

demonstr. Pronoun.

the definite Article.

in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.

DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:

joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Art-GSF — Article · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

T-GSF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

ov:

(1) In Anglo-Saxon, had the meaning "from," "away from" (as the strengthened form "off" has still), and was not used for genitive or possessive relations, these being expressed by special case-forms. In the Norman period, however, "of" was taken to represent the French de (a use well developed by the time of Chaucer), and in the Elizabethan period both senses of "of" were in common use. But after about 1600 the later force of the word became predominant, and in the earlier sense (which is now practically obsolete) it was replaced by other prepositions. In consequence the King James Version (and in some cases the Revised Version (British and American)) contains many uses of "of" that are no longer familiar--most of them, to be sure, causing no difficulty, but there still being a few responsible for real obscurities.

English usagewhat the translators’ English meant
Webster's Dictionary (1828), Webster's Unabridged (1913), Webster's Dictionary (1806)

OF, preposition ov. [Gr.]

1. From or out of; proceeding from, as the cause, source, means, author or agent bestowing.

I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered to you. 1 Corinthians 11:1.

For it was of the Lord to harden their hearts. Joshua 11:1.

It is of the Lord's mercies that we are not consumed.

Lamentations 3:1.

The whole disposing thereof is of the Lord. Proverbs 16:1.

Go, inquire of the Lord for me. 2 Chronicles 34:2.

That holy thing that shall be born of thee. Luke 1:1.

Hence of is the sign of the genitive case, the case that denotes production; as the son of man, the son proceeding from man, produced from man. This is the primary sense, although we now say, produced by man. 'Part of these were slain; ' that is, a number separate, for part denotes a division; the sense then is, a number from or out of the whole were slain. So also, 'some of these were slain; ' that is…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
64%the
the64% · 13160×<the>28% · 5846×those3% · 597×other renderings4% · 788×other renderings1% · 294×

20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
subject34%adverbial32%object24%predicate5%indirect object4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
αὐτόςεἰμίI am, existἐγώ
ἐν
καίand, even, also,αὐτόςὁArticle the
εἰς
αὐτόςεἰσέρχομαιI go in, come inἔρχομαιI come, go
αὐτός
λέγωI say, speakδέbut, on the otheπρός
εἰμίI am, exist
οὗτοςσύἐγώ
ὁof the19783×
what comes after →
θεόςGod, a god
ὁArticle theκαίand, even, also,ἐγώ
δέbut, on the other ha
λέγωI say, speakἸησοῦςJesusἀποκρίνομαιI answer, reply
ἸησοῦςJesus
λέγωI say, speakκαίand, even, also,ὁArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, master,
ἐγώἸησοῦςJesusὁArticle the
πατήρfather, Father, ance
ἐγώσύαὐτός

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὁ · 19,783× in the New Testament
Matthew Acts Luke John Revelation Mark Romans 1 Corinthians Hebrews 2 Corinthians Ephesians 1 John

40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →

Across the New Testament27 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome The Epistle of Barnabas
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 1c. AD 40

Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.argc. AD 75–95

ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 1.1c. AD 100

Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 1st c. AD 3rd c. BC 6th c. AD
P.Stras. 2 89Pathyris100 BC

r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

P.Adl. 11Pathyris99 BC

ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
πόλεωςpolis city G4172 Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
163× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
In the Bible, a city refers to a town with walls, like Jerusalem in Matthew 2:23. It can also mean the people who live there, as in Matthew 10:5. Jesus often visited cities during his ministry.
Tyndale gloss
city
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

πόλις (polis) means 'city' and can refer to an enclosed town or the inhabitants of a city. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in the context of specific cities like Jerusalem or as a general term for urban areas. The word is derived from various dialects and has a rich history in classical literature, indicating both physical locations and the concept of citizenship.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

πόλις, -εως, ἡ,

[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for עִיר;]

a city: Mt 2:23, Mk 1:45, Lk 4:29, Jo 4:8, al. mult.; opp. to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mt 9:35 10:11, Mk 6:56, Lk 8:1 13:22; c. nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Ac 11:5 16:14; c. id. in gen. appos. (Bl., § 35, 5), Ac 8:5, II Pe 2:6; gen., of the region, Lk 1:26 4:31, Jo 4:5; of the inhabitants, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (otherwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of the temple erected there, πόλις…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

πόλις. In the second Logia fragment, P Oxy IV. 6542, Blass suggested the restoration ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ mrd[Ats (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), and is followed by White (Sayzzgs, p. 9). It may be worth while to note that this ancient by-form of πόλις occurs in three ostraca of the reign of Caligula as a proper name, Ostr 380! διαγεγρά(φηκεν) Πτόλις Ψενεν(ούφιος), 7. 3811, 3821, and similarly in PSI IV. 317! (a.p. 95) ᾿Ασκληπιάδης Πτόλιδι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. This recalls πολιτάρχης 5 the fact that πτόλεμος also survived in the royal name ἹΠτολεμαῖος. The distributive force which πόλις has in several Lucan passages (Ac 154 a/.) and in Tit 1° is to be set against the very different meaning of the phrase in sundry documents of the new collection from Alexandria (reign of Augustus). Schubart, who edits the documents in BGU IV., notes (Archiv v. p. 38) that in a good many papers relating to the hire of a nurse…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

πόλις (polis) — city.

πόλις,

Epic dialect also πτόλις (found sometimes in Trag. etc., see at {πτόλις}), ἡ: Epic dialect forms, accusative singular πόληα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; genitive πόλιος or πτόλιος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] P.(scanned ?~X ?~X ?~X ¯ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect forms, genitive πόλεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; dative mostly πόλει, but πόλῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πόλῑς [Refs]: Doric dialect genitive singular πόλιος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; dative singular πόλι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; dative plural πολίεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολίεσσι Foed.Lac. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect πόλιθι [Refs]: Aeolic dialect genitive πόλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] disyllable (as also in Comedy texts, except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect dual πόλη [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—city, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἄκρη, ἀκροτάτη, ={ἀκρόπολις}, the citadel, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; which at Athens also was in early times called…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

πόλις

polis

probably from the same as 4171, or perhaps from 4183; a town

(properly, with walls, of greater or less size):--city.

see GREEK for 4183

see GREEK for 4171

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

πόλις, εως, ἡ

n.f.

a city

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

πόλις polis 162x

a city, an enclosed and walled town, Mt. 10:5, 11; 11:1; meton. the inhabitants of a city, Mt. 8:34; 10:15; with a gen. of person, or a personal pronoun, the city of any one, the city of one’s birth or residence, Mt. 9:1; Lk. 2:4, 11; ἡ πόλις, the city, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, Jerusalem, Mt. 21:18; 28:11; met. a place of permanent residence, abode, home, Heb. 11:10, 16; 13:14. The frequency count does not include its occurrence in the name Νέαν πόλιν in Acts 16:11

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

πόλις πόλις, ιος, ἡ, gen. πόλεως dissyll. in attic Poets ionic and doric πόλιος dissyll. in Il. doric πολίεσι:—acc. πόλεις, πόλιας:— a city, Hom., Hes., etc.; πόλις ἄκρη and ἀκροτάτη, ῀ ἀκρόπολις, the citadel, Il.: this at Athens was often called simply πόλις, while the rest of the city was called ἄστυ, Thuc., etc.:—the name of the city was often added in gen., Ἰλίου π., Ἄργους π. the city of . . , Aesch., etc.; also in appos., ἡ Μένδη π. Thuc.

one's city or country, Od., etc.

when πόλις and ἄστυ are joined, the former is the body of citizens, the latter their dwellings, Il.; ὧν πόλις ἀνάριθμος ὄλλυται, where πόλις = a number of citizens, Soph.:—hence,

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-GSF — Noun · genitive · singular · feminine
genitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-GSF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Feminine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

sit'-i (`ir, qiryah; polis):

I. THE CANAANITE CITY

1. Origin

2. Extent

3. Villages

4. Sites

5. External Appearance

6. General

II. THE CITY OF THE JEWISH OCCUPATION

1. Tower or Stronghold

2. High Place

3. Broad Place

4. Streets

5. General Characteristics

III. STORE CITIES

IV. LEVITICAL CITIES

LITERATURE

I. The Canaanite City.

1. Origin:

The development of the Canaanite city has been traced by Macalister in his report on the excavation at Gezer (Palestine Exploration Fund Statement, 1904, 108 ff). It originated on the slopes of a bare rocky spur, in which the Neolithic Troglodytes quarried their habitations out of the solid rock, the stones therefrom being used to form a casing to the earthen ramparts, with which the site was afterwards surrounded and which served as a protection against the intrusion of enemies. Later Semitic intruders occupied the site, stone houses were built, and high stone defense…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

City

The earliest mention of city-building is that of Enoch, which was built by Cain (Gen. 4:17). After the confusion of tongues, the descendants of Nimrod founded several cities (10:10-12). Next, we have a record of the cities of the Canaanites, Sidon, Gaza, Sodom, etc. (10:12, 19; 11:3, 9; 36:31-39). The earliest description of a city is that of Sodom (19:1-22). Damascus is said to be the oldest existing city in the world. Before the time of Abraham there were cities in Egypt (Num. 13:22). The Israelites in Egypt were employed in building the “treasure cities” of Pithom and Raamses (Ex. 1:11); but it does not seem that they had any cities of their own in Goshen (Gen.…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
79%city
city79% · 131×cities10% · 16×town7% · 12×towns2% · 4×other renderings1% · 2×

165 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial60%subject20%object12%predicate7%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 163 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὁArticle the
εἰςἐνκαίand, even, also,
εἰς
κατοικέωI dwell in, settκαίand, even, also,πόλιςa city
κατά
διοδεύωI journey througὁArticle theδιαπορεύομαιI journey throug
ἄνDisj
δέbut, on the otheὅς
ἐν
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastεἰμίI am, existκίνδυνοςdanger, peril, r
πόλιςcity163×
what comes after →
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁArticle theεἰςὁράωI see, look upon
ὁArticle the
μέγαςἅγιοςset apart, holy,ΓαλιλαίαGalilee
ἐκεῖνος
καίand, even, also,ἐκτινάσσωI shake offὁArticle the
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
καίand, even, also,ἕωςuntil, as far asἐν
οὗτος
φεύγωI flee, escape, ἐπίπαρά

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceπόλις · 163× in the New Testament
Acts Luke Matthew Revelation John Mark Hebrews 2 Corinthians 2 Peter James Jude Romans

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament13 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 585 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 11c. AD 40

ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.62c. AD 75–95

ὅρους τε γῆς πρῶτος ἔθετο καὶ πόλιν ἐδείματο καὶ τείχεσιν ὠχύρωσεν εἰς ταὐτὸν συνελθεῖν τοὺς οἰκείους καταναγκάσας.

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 16.5c. AD 100

πάλιν ὡς ἔμελλεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ὁ ναὸς καὶ ὁ λαὸς Ἰσραὴλ παραδίδοσθαι, ἐφανερώθη.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
3rd c. AD 4th c. AD 6th c. AD 2nd c. AD 2nd c. BC
P.Lond. 3 p. 18 no. 678Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)100 BC–99 BC

ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ

P.Grenf. 2 35Pathyris99 BC

Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ

P.Adl. 20Poinkoris (Diopolites)99 BC

τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ Πετεσούχου τοῦ Ἑρμίου

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
χρυσίονchrusion gold G5553 Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
13× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Gold refers to a valuable metal or a golden article, like the gold plating in 1 Corinthians 3:12. This word can describe gold coins, ornaments, or other valuable items. It is often used to talk about wealth and value.
Tyndale gloss
gold
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

χρυσίον is a diminutive form of χρυσός, meaning a piece of gold or gold in general. It encompasses various uses, including gold coins, ornaments, and articles made of gold. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts related to both material wealth and adornment, such as in 1 Peter 1:7 and Revelation 21:18. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

χρυσίον, -ου, τό

(dimin. of χρυσός, q.v.),

[in LXX chiefly for זָהָב ;]

a piece of gold, gold: I Co 3:12, He 9:4, I Pe 1:7, Re 3:18 21:18, 21; of golden ornaments, I Ti 2:9 (WH, txt., RV), I Pe 3:3, Re 17:4 18:16 (WH, txt., R); of gold coin, money, Ac 3:6 20:33, I Pe 1:18.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

χρυσίον, -ov, τό, (dimin. of ypucos, cf. φορτίον), fr. Hdt. down, Sept. for 37%, gold, both that which lies imbedded in the earth and is dug out of it (Plat. Euthyd. p. 288 e. ; Sept. Gen. ii. 11; hence μεταλλευθέν, Leian. de sacr. 11) : xp: πεπυρωμένον ex πυρός, [R. V. refined by fire], Rev. iii. 18; and that which has been smelted and wrought, Heb. ix. 4; [1 Co. iii.12 T Tr WH]; 1 Pet. i. 7; Rev. xxi. 18,21; i. q. gold coin, ‘gold’: Acts iii. 6; xx. 33; 1 Pet. i. 18; golden ornaments, precious things made of gold, 1 Tim. ii. 9 L WH txt.; 1 Pet. iii. 3; Rev. xvii. 4 GLWHtxt.; xviii. 16 GL Trtxt. WH txt. (cf. χρυσός.

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

χρυσίον, “gold,” is used of (a) ‘‘gold coin,” as in Ac 35 a/., in P Cairo Zen III. 593517 (B.c. 243) χρυσίου δραχμὰς v, ‘four hundred drachmae of gold,” P Oxy II. 259! (a.p. 23) τῶν χρυσίων μν[α]ιήων δύο, ‘‘two minae of gold.” (4) ‘‘gold ornaments,” as in 1 Pet 3%, in P Michigan Inv. No. 1367% (iii/A.D.) (=/ourn. of Egypt. Arch. xiii. Ρ. 62) veykov ἐρχομένη σου τὰ χρυσία ἀλλὰ μὴ αὐτὰ φορέσῃς ἐν τῷ πλο[(]ῳ, “when you come bring your gold ornaments, but do not wear them in the boat,” P Oxy X. 127378 (A.D. 260) Ta μὲν χρυσία, the gold objects of a dowry. , χρυσοδακτύλιος, ““wearing a gold ring,” does not seem to occur except ἢ Jas 25, but cf. the similar use of χρυσόχειρ in Lucian 77. 20, and Epict. i. 22. 18 γέρων πολιὸς χρυσοῦς δακτυλίους ἔχων…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

χρυσίον (chrusion) — gold.

χρῡσίον, τό,

diminutive of χρυσός, a piece of gold, generally, gold, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

2. anything made of gold, gold plate, ornaments of gold, etc., ἄσημον [NT+5th c.BC+]

3. especially gold coin, money, [Refs 5th c.BC+]pieces of gold, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

4. gold thread, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. as a term of endearment, my little treasure! [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II.2. ={τὸ τῶν παιδίων αἰδοῖον}, [Refs 5th c.AD+]

Strong's Greek Dictionary

χρυσίον

chrusion

diminutive of 5557; a golden article, i.e. gold plating, ornament, or

coin:--gold.

see GREEK for 5557

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

χρυσίον, ου, τό

n.n.

a golden ornament

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

χρυσίον chrysion 12x

gold, Heb. 9:4; 1 Pet. 1:7; Rev. 3:18; 21:18, 21; spc. gold when coined or manufactured; golden ornaments, 1 Tim. 2:9; 1 Pet. 3:3; Rev. 17:4; 18:16; gold coin, money, Acts 3:6; 20:33; 1 Pet. 1:18*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

χρυσίον χρυ_σίον, ου, τό, Dim. of χρύσος a piece of gold, generally, gold, Hdt., Thuc., etc.; pl., Dem.

gold coin, money, Eur., Ar., Plat., etc.; χρυσία pieces of gold, Plat.

as a term of endearment, my golden one! my little treasure! Ar., Anth.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSN — Noun · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSN Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

gold (zahabh; chrusos):

1. Terms:

No metal has been more frequently mentioned in Old Testament writings than gold, and none has had more terms applied to it. Among these terms the one most used is zahabh. The Arabic equivalent, dhahab, is still the common name for gold throughout Palestine, Syria and Egypt. With zahabh frequently occur other words which, translated, mean "pure" (Ex 25:11), "refined" (1Ch 28:18), "finest" (1Ki 10:18), "beaten" (1Ki 10:17), "Ophir" (Ps 45:9).

Other terms occurring are: paz, "fine gold" (Job 28:17;

Gold

(1.) Heb. zahab, so called from its yellow colour (Ex. 25:11; 1 Chr. 28:18; 2 Chr. 3:5).

(2.) Heb. segor, from its compactness, or as being enclosed or treasured up; thus precious or “fine gold” (1 Kings 6:20; 7:49).

(3.) Heb. paz, native or pure gold (Job 28:17; Ps. 19:10; 21:3, etc.).

(4.) Heb. betzer, “ore of gold or silver” as dug out of the mine (Job 36:19, where it means simply riches).

Smith's Bible Dictionary

Gold was known from the very earliest times. (Genesis 2:11) It was at first used chiefly for ornaments, etc. (Genesis 24:22) Coined money was not known to the ancients till a comparatively late period; and on the Egyptian tombs gold is represented as being weighed in rings for commercial purposes. Comp. (Genesis 43:21) Gold was extremely abundant in ancient times, (1 Chronicles 22:14; 2 Chronicles 1:15; 9:9; Daniel 3:1; Nahum 2:9) but this did not depreciate its value, because of the enormous quantities consumed by…

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

A well-known valuable metal, found in many parts of the world, and obtained anciently in Ophir, Job 28:16; Parvaim, 2Ch 3:6; Sheba, and Raamah, Eze 27:22. Job alludes to gold in various forms, Job 22:24 28:15-19. Abraham was rich in it, and female ornaments were early made of it, Ge 13:2 24:22,35. It is spoken of throughout Scripture; and the use of it among and ancient Hebrews, in its native and mixed state, and for the same purposes as at present, was very common. The Ark of the Covenant was overlaid with pure gold; the mercy seat, the vessels and utensils belonging to the tabernacle, and those also of the house of…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
92%gold
gold92% · 11×than gold8% · 1×

12 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial39%object23%predicate23%subject15%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 13 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
καίand, even, also, nam
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekelπλέγμαbraided hair, an
ἤDisj
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekel
πόλιςa city
ὁArticle the
θεμέλιοςbelonging to the fou
ὁArticle the
πάντοθενfrom all sides
περικαλύπτωI cover up
χρυσίονgold13×
what comes after →
ἤDisj
ἱματισμόςraiment, clothinμαργαρίτηςa pearlἔνδυσιςa putting on of
καίand, even, also, nam
λίθοςa stone
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
ὅμοιοςlike, similar toὡςas, like as, how
οὐNeg
ὑπάρχωI am, exist, am
ἀργύριονsilver, a shekel, mo
λίθοςa stone

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceχρυσίον · 13× in the New Testament
Revelation 1 Peter Acts 1 Corinthians 1 Timothy Hebrews
Across the New Testament6 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 152 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Josephus Philo of Alexandria The Shepherd of Hermas
Philo of AlexandriaAllegorical Interpretation of Genesis 1.63c. AD 40

οὗτος ὁ κυκλῶν πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν Εὐιλάτ, ἐκεῖ οὗ ἐστι τὸ χρυσίον·

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 3.103c. AD 75–95

ἔριά τε τοῖς προειρημένοις ἄνθεσι μεμολυσμένα καὶ λίνου βύσσον λίθους τε τούτοις ἐνδεδεμένους, οὓς χρυσίῳ καθειργνύντες ἄνθρωποι κόσμῳ χρῶνται πολυτελεῖ, θυμιαμάτων τε πλῆθος συνέφερον·

The Shepherd of HermasThe Shepherd of Hermas 4.3.4c. AD 140

ὥσπερ γὰρ τὸ χρυσίον δοκιμάζεται διὰ τοῦ πυρὸς καὶ εὔχρηστον γίνεται, οὕτως καὶ ὑμεῖς δοκιμάζεσθε οἱ κατοικοῦντες ἐν αὐτοῖς.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
6th c. AD 7th c. AD 5th c. AD 4th c. AD 8th c. AD
P.Hamb. 3 220Ptolemais Euergetis (?) (Arsinoites)AD 223–AD 224

ἔχειν παρʼ αὐτῆς ἐφʼ ἑαυτῇ ἅμα τῇ τοῦ γάμου συμβιώσει φερνὴν διὰ χειρὸς χρυσίου καθαροῦ μναιαῖα ὀκτὼ ἐν κοσμαρίοις, ἅ ἐστιν … … … τῶν λοιπῶν μναιαίων δύο

ÉdP 5 (1939), p. 87-Karanis (Arsinoites)AD 297

, καὶ ἐν τούτῳ προχωρήσαντος αὐτῇ ἔπειτα προηνέγκατο ὡς χρεωστεῖται αὐτῇ ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς χρυσίον μναιαῖον ἕν . διά τε μεσιτῶν φήσασα καὶ τοῦτο εὖγʼ ἀποδεικτὸν μὴ καταστήσασα, νῦν

P.Cair. Isid. 89Karanis? (Arsinoites)AD 308

καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων αὐτοῖς πάντων καθάπερ ἐκ δίκης, ὅπερ ἀργύριον ἐχώρησεν εἰς συνωνὴν χρυσίου καὶ ἀσήμου ὑπὲρ τῆς ἑαυτῶν κτήσεως εἰς τὴν θείαν ἐπιβολήν, καὶ ἐπερωτηθέντες ὡμολόγησαν. Αὐρήλιοι

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
καθαρὸνkatharos pure G2513 Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
26× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Something that is clean or pure, like a clean heart in Matthew 5:8. It can describe physical, ceremonial, or moral purity.
Amplified meaning
clean, undefiled
Tyndale gloss
clean
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

καθαρός is an adjective meaning 'clean' or 'pure,' used in various contexts including physical cleanliness, ceremonial purity, and moral integrity. It appears in the New Testament in verses like Matthew 23:26 and Acts 18:6, where it describes both tangible items and ethical states. The term is related to the Hebrew word for purity and is often contrasted with concepts of defilement.

Trench, Synonyms of the New Testament — εἰλικρινής, καθαρός from a scan

THE difference between these words is hard to express, even while one may instinctively feel it. They are continually found in company with one another (Plato, Phileb. 52d; Eusebius, Prep. Evan. xv. 15. 4), and words associated with the one are in constant association with the other. EiAcxpevns occurs only twice in the N. T. (Phil. i. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1); once also in the Apocrypha (Wisd. vii. 25) ; εἰλικρινεια three times (1 Cor. v. 8; 2 Cor. i. 12: ii. 17). Its etymology, like that of ‘sincere,’ which is its best English rendering, is doubtful, uncertainty in this matter causing also uncertainty in the breathing. Some, as Stallbaum (Plato, Phedo, 66 a, note), connect with ἔλος, ἴλη (εἴλειν, εἴλεῖν), that which is cleansed by much rolling and shaking to and fro in the sieve; ‘ volubili agitatione secretum atque adeocribro purgatum.’? Another more familiar and more beautiful etymology…

Read the full entry →
Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

καθαρός, -ά, -όν,

[in LXX chiefly for טָהוֹר;]

pure, clean.

Physically: Mt 23:26 27:59, Jo 13:10, 11 (fig.), Jo 15:3 (fig., as of a vine cleansed by pruning), He 10:22, Re 15:6 19:8, 14 21:18, 21.

Ceremonially: Lk 11:41, Ro 14:20, Tit 1:15.

Ethically;

of persons: Jo 13:16, Ac 18:6, Tit 1:15; ὁ κ. τῇ καρδίᾳ (καθαρὸς χειρας, Hdt., i, 35), Mt 5:8; seq. ἀπό (cl. c. gen. simp.; Bl., § 36, 11; Deiss.…

Read the full entry →
Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

καθαρός, -d, -dv; [akin to Lat. castus, in-cestus, Eng. chaste, chasten; Curtius § 26; Vanitek p. 177]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. mostly for WW ; clean, pure, (free from the admixture or adhesion of any thing that soils, adulterates, corrupts) ; a. physically : Mt. xxiii. 26; xxvii. 59; Heb. x. 22 (23); Rev. xv. 6; xix. 8, 14, and Ree. in xxii. 1; χρυσίον, purified by fire, Rev. xxi. 18, 21; ina similitude, like a vine cleansed by pruning and so fitted to bear fruit, Jn. xv.3; ὁ NeAoup.. . - καθαρὸς ὅλος (where the idea which Christ expresses figuratively is as follows: ‘he whose inmost nature has been renovated does not need radical renewal, but only to be cleansed from every several fault into which he may fall through intercourse with the unrenewed world’), Jn. xiii. 10. b. in a levitical sense ; clean, i. 6. the use of which is not forbidden, imparts no uncleanness: πάντα καθαρά, Ro.…

Read the full entry →
Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

καθαρός. The word and its derivatives have a wide range of use, being applied physically to animals, land, grain, bread, milk, etc., e.g. Chrest. I. 89° (A.D. 149) κ]αὶ δοκιμάσας (μόσχον) ἐσφράγισα ὡς ἔστιν καθαρός, BGU IV. 1018° (iii/A.D.) παραδώσο (/.dow) τὰς ἀρούρας καθαρὰς ὡς παρέλαβον, P | Oxy VIII. 1124! (A.D. 26) πυρὸν νέο[ν] καθαρὸν ἄδολον, 0. IV. 736% (c. A.D. 1) ἄρτου καθαροῦ παιδ(ῶν), BGU IV. 11098 (B.C. 5) θηλάζουσαν τῶι ἰδίῳ αὐτῆς γάλακτι καθαρῷ, and metaphorically to ‘‘freedom” from disadvantages of various kinds, as in 74. 10407! (ii/A.D.) καθαρ[ὰ]ν yap ἔχων τὴν ψυχὴν οὐδενὸς ἐπιστί. . . .]y τῶν διαβαλόντων, or in the epitaphs Aazbe/ 516! (c. A.D. 1) καθα[ρ]ὰν δὲ φυλάξας [σωφροσύνης ἀρετὴν τόν]δε λέλονχε τάφον, 653. (iii/A.D.) ὡς ἀνίῃ καθαρή, of a mind freed from care: cf. also P Lond 178'3 (A.D. 145) (= II. p. 207) τὸ δὲ χειρόγραφον τοῦτο δισσὸν γραφὲν καθαρὸν ἀπὸ…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

καθαρός (katharos) — clean.

κᾰθᾰρ-ός, ά, όν,

Doric dialect καθαρός [Refs 5th c.AD+], Aeolic dialect κόθ- [Refs 7th c.BC+]; compare ἀνακαθαίρω, κάθαρσις:

1. physically clean, spotless (not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; of persons, cleanly, κ. περὶ ἐσθῆτα [Refs 4th c.BC+]

2. clear of admixture, clear, pure, especially of water, Βορυσθένης ῥέει καθαρὸς παρὰ θολεροῖσι [LXX+5th c.BC+]; κ. φάος, φέγγος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of white bread, Wilcken [LXX+3rd c.BC+]; ἄλευρον κ. [Refs]; χρυσίον, ἀργύριον -ώτατον, [Refs 5th c.BC+]winnowed, πυρὸς κ. ἄδολος [Refs 2nd c.BC+], etc.; of metals, etc., σίδηρος [Refs 5th c.AD+], etc.; ἀρωμάτων, καθαρῶν, λαχάνων, uncertain meaning in [Refs 4th c.AD+]; ἄκρατος καὶ κ. νοῦς [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of feelings, unmixed, μῖσος τῆς ἀλλοτρίας φύσεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; serene, φρήν [Refs 5th…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

καθαρός

katharos

of uncertain affinity; clean (literally or figuratively):--clean,

clear, pure.

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

καθαρός, ά, όν

Adj

clean, pure, unstained

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

καθαρός katharos 27x

clean, pure, unsoiled, Mt. 23:26; 27:59; met. clean from guilt, guiltless, innocent, Acts 18:6; 20:26; sincere, upright, virtuous, void of evil, Mt. 5:8; Jn. 15:3; clean ceremonially and morally, Lk. 11:41

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

καθαρός κα^θα^ρός, clear of dirt, clean, spotless, unsoiled, Od., Hdt., Eur.

clear, open, free, ἐν καθαρῷ (sc. τόπῳ) in a clear, open space, Il.; ἐν καθαρῷ βῆναι to leave the way clear, Soph.; διὰ καθαροῦ ῥέειν, of a river whose course is clear and open, Hdt.; τὸ ἐμποδὼν ἐγεγόνεε καθαρόν the hindrance was cleared away, id. Hdt.:—c. gen., γλῶσσα καθαρὴ τῶν σημηΐων clear of the marks, id. Hdt.

in moral sense, clear from shame or pollution, pure, καθαρῷ θανάτῳ Od.: esp. clear of guilt or defilement, clean, pure, Theogn., Aesch.; καθαρὸς χεῖρας Hdt.:—so, of persons purified after pollution, ἱκέτης προσῆλθες κ. Aesch.; of things, βωμοί, θύματα, δόμοι, μέλαθρα id. Aesch., Eur.:—c. gen. clear of or from a charge, κ. ἐγκλημάτων, ἀδικίας, κακῶν, etc., Horace's sceleris purus…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSN — Adjective · nominative · singular · neuter
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular neuter.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSN Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Neuter

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
54%pure
pure54% · 15×clean32% · 9×clear7% · 2×innocent4% · 1×purity4% · 1×other renderings0% · 0×

28 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
predicate54%adverbial27%object12%subject8%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 26 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
πᾶςall, the whole, ever
ὁράωI see, look uponοὐχίIrg
σύ
καίand, even, also,ἤδηnow, alreadyκεφαλήthe head
ὁArticle the
μακάριοςhappy, blessedκαθαρόςclean, pure, uns
ἐκ
ἀγάπηloveκύριοςlord, Lord, mast
ἐν
πίστιςfaith, belief, tπρόγονοςan ancestor
καθαρόςpure26×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
καρδίαthe heart, innerκαθαρόςclean, pure, unsδέbut, on the othe
εἰμίI am, exist
ἀλλάbut, exceptδιάἀπό
ἀλλάbut, except
κακόςbad, evilμιαίνωI stain, pollute
καρδίαthe heart, inner lif
καίand, even, also,
συνείδησιςthe conscience
ὡςas, like as, how

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceκαθαρός · 26× in the New Testament
Revelation John Matthew Titus 1 Timothy 2 Timothy Acts Hebrews James Luke Romans
Across the New Testament11 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
The Hebrew behind itwhat the Septuagint translators were rendering

Counted over the 128 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.

Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria Josephus The Shepherd of Hermas Clement of Rome Ignatius of Antioch
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Creation of the World 31c. AD 40

καὶ ἔστιν ὑπερουράνιος ἀστήρ, πηγὴ τῶν αἰσθητῶν ἀστέρων, ἣν οὐκ ἂν ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καλέσειεν ἄν τις παναύγειαν, ἀφ’ ἧς ἥλιος καὶ σελήνη καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι πλάνητές τε καὶ ἀπλανεῖς ἀρύτονται, καθ’ ὅσον ἑκάστῳ δύναμις, τὰ πρέποντα φέγγη, τῆς ἀμιγοῦς καὶ καθαρᾶς…

JosephusAntiquities of the Jews 1.15c. AD 75–95

ἤδη τοίνυν τοὺς ἐντευξομένους τοῖς βιβλίοις παρακαλῶ τὴν γνώμην θεῷ προσανέχειν καὶ δοκιμάζειν τὸν ἡμέτερον νομοθέτην, εἰ τήν τε φύσιν ἀξίως αὐτοῦ κατενόησε καὶ τῇ δυνάμει πρεπούσας ἀεὶ τὰς πράξεις ἀνατέθεικε πάσης καθαρὸν τὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ φυλάξας…

The Epistle of BarnabasThe Epistle of Barnabas 15.1c. AD 100

Ἔτι οὖν καὶ περὶ τοῦ σαββάτου γέγραπται ἐν τοῖς δέκα λόγοις, ἐν οἷς ἐλάλησεν ἐν τῷ ὄρει Σινᾶ πρὸς Μωϋσῆν κατὰ πρόσωπον: Καὶ ἁγιάσατε τὸ σάββατον κυρίου χερσὶν καθαραῖς καὶ καρδίᾳ καθαρᾷ.

In the everyday Greek (the secular world, not the church)letters, leases, receipts — nobody writing one is trying to sound biblical
2nd c. AD 3rd c. AD 6th c. AD 4th c. AD 1st c. AD
P.Grenf. 1 28Krokodilopolis (Pathyrites)109 BC

r … πυρὸν νέον καθαρὸν ἄδολον μέτρωι ὧι καὶ παρείληφεν καὶ ἀποκαθεστάμενον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασιν. ἐὰν

P.Grenf. 2 29Pathyris103 BC

δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότωσαν οἱ δεδανεισμένοι Παήρι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν λ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους νέον καθαρὸν καὶ ἄδολον ἀπὸ παντός, καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τοῖς

P.Adl. 15Pathyris (?)101 BC

τὸ δὲ δάνειον τοῦτο ἀποδότω ὁ δεδανεισμένος Ὥρωι ἐν μηνὶ Παχὼν τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους καθαρὸν ἀπὸ παντὸς καὶ ἀποκαθεσταμένον εἰς οἶκον ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις ἰδίοις ἀνηλώμασι μέτρῳ ᾧ καὶ

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ὡςhōs as G5613 Adverb
502× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
This word means as or when, showing a comparison or timing. It's used in many verses, like Mark 4:26 and 1 Corinthians 3:15, to show how things are done. It helps explain how or when something happens.
Tyndale gloss
as/when
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὡς is an adverb and conjunction derived from the relative pronoun ὅς. It is used in various contexts to mean 'as,' 'like,' or 'when,' and can indicate manner, comparison, or time. In the New Testament, it appears frequently to express similarity or to introduce clauses, such as in comparisons or temporal phrases. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its usage.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὡς, adverbial form of the relative pron. ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.

As relat. adv. of manner, as, like as, just as, even as;

with a demonstrative, like οὕτως, expressed or understood: οὕτως . . . ὡς, Mk 4:26, I Co 3:15, Eph 5:28, Ja 2:12, al.; ὡς . . . οὕτως, Ac 8:32, I Co 7:17, al.; elliptically (sc. οὕτως, οὕτω), c. nom., Mt 6:29, al.; c. acc., Mt 19:19, Mk 12:31, al.; c. prep., Mt 26:55, Read the full entry →

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὡς [ Treg. (by mistake) in Mt. xxiv. 38 ὥς; cf. W. 462 (431); Chandler § 934, and reff. in Ebeling, Lex. Hom. s. v. p. 494

Moulton & Milligan, Vocabulary of the Greek Testament from a scan

ὡς. Ι. = “45: P Goodsp Cairo 44 (ii/B.c.) (= Selections, Ῥ- 24) εἰ tppwoar . .. εἴη dv ὡς αἱρούμεθα, “if you are well, it will be as we desire,” BGU I. 1637 (A.D. 108) καὶ yap ἄλλοι ὡς πληγέντες ὑπὸ αὐτοῦ ἀναφόριον δεδώκασι, “for others have given information (from time to time) ἃ5 having been assaulted by him,” P Flor I. 5618 (A.p. 234) ὡς καθήκει, and BGU IV. το. 1 (iv/y A.D.) κα]ταβληθῆναι ὡς φονέα. 2. = “that,” ‘ how,” after verbs of saying, thinking, etc.: P Tebt I. τοῦ (B.c. 119) φρόντισον ὡς τὰ τῆς ὑποσχέσεως ἐκπληρωθήσεται, “take care that the terms of his agreement are fulfilled” (Edd.), and P Tebt II. 4101? (i/A.D.) μν[ἤ]σθητι o[s] ἐν τῷ Τρ[ιστόμῳ pe ἐφιλοτ[ιυἹμοῦ σὺν ἐμοὶ μεῖναι, ‘remember how zealous you were at Tristomos to remain with me” (Fdd.). 3. Ὁ. ind. with dy, as in Σ Cor 125, cf. P Par 4615 (B.C. 152) ὡς ἂν εὐκαιρήσω, παραχρῆμα παρέσομαι πρός σε. 4. c. conj. with…

Read the full entry →
Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὡς (hōs) — as/when.

ὡς:—

Summary:

__A as adverb of Manner.

__A.Aa ὧς and ὥς (with accent), so, thus.

__A.Ab ὡς (without accent) of the Relat. pronoun ὅς, as.

__A.Ac ὡς Relat. and Interrog., how.

__A.Ad ὡς temporal, when.

__A.Ae ὡς Local, where,

__B ὡς, as CONJUNCTION.

__C,D various usages. adverb of Manner:

__A.Aa ὥς, Demonstr., ={οὕτως}, so, thus, frequently in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Ionic dialect Prose, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὥς simply ={οὕτως}, [Refs 5th c.BC+]

__A.2 καὶ ὧς even so, nevertheless, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; οὐδ᾽ ὧς not even so, [Refs 8th c.BC+] are used in Trag. and Attic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κἂν ὧς, εἴπερ μέλει σοι, ἀπόστειλόν μοί τινα [Refs 4th c.AD+]; δουλεύων καθὼς καὶ ὧς [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; Thess. καὶ οὗς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; for this phrase the accentuation ὧς[Refs 2nd…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὡς

hos

probably adverb of comparative from 3739; which how, i.e. in that

manner (very variously used, as follows):--about, after (that),

(according) as (it had been, it were), as soon (as), even as (like),

for, how (greatly), like (as, unto), since, so (that), that, to wit,

unto, when(-soever), while, X with all speed.

see GREEK for 3739

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὡς

Adv

as, like as, how, while, so that

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὡς hōs 504x

conjunction formed from the relative pronoun ὅς, used as a comparative part. and conj., as, correlatively, Mk. 4:26; Jn. 7:46; Rom. 5:15; as, like as, Mt. 10:16; Eph. 5:8; according as, Gal. 6:10; as, as it were, Rev. 8:8; as, Lk. 16:1; Acts 3:12; before numerals, about, Mk. 5:13; conj. that, Read the full entry →

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὡς thus, as, so that, since

A. ADVERB of Manner, either ὥς (with accent) Demonstr. so, thus, Lat. sic;— or ὡς (without accent) Relat. as, Lat. ut. B. ὡς, as CONJUNCTION. C, D. various usages.

of Manner:

ὥς, Demonstr. = οὕτως, so, thus, Lat. sic, Hom., Hdt.; rare in attic:— καὶ ὥς, even so, nevertheless, οὐδ᾽ ὥς, μηδ᾽ ὥς, not even so, in no wise, Hom., Soph.

in Comparisons, ὥς . . , ὡς . . , so . . as . . , Lat. sic . . ut . . , Il., Plat.

thus, for instance, Od.

ὡς, Relat., as, Lat. ut, first in Hom.; οὕτως ὡς, Lat. sic ut; but the antec. is often omitted: similes are commonly introduced by ὡς ὅτε, ὡς δ᾽ ὅτε, where ὅτε often seems superfluous, ἤριπε δ᾽, ὡς ὅτε πύργος [ἤριπε] Il.:—this ὡς takes the accent at the end of a clause or when it follows the word dependent on it; θεὸς δ᾽ ὣς τίετο δήμῳ Il.; οἱ δὲ φέβοντο, βόες ὥς…

Read the full entry →
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adv — Adverb
adverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

az: Conj. and adverb (usually Greek hos hosper, kathos), designating:

(1) Likeness: (a) between nouns (Ge 3:5; Jud 6:5; Php 2:8; Heb 11:27,29); (b) between verbs (Lu 6:36; Joh 5:30; 1Co 10:7); (c) between adjectives (1Co 15:48).

(2) Limitation (with respect to a particular aspect or relation) (1Pe 4:15,16).

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
60%as
as60% · 310×like16% · 84×when8% · 41×how4% · 21×about4% · 20×other renderings6% · 33×other renderings1% · 7×

516 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 22 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

What it does in the sentencefrom the Nestle 1904 treebank
adverbial31%predicate12%object4%subject4%

Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 502 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
αὐτός
πρόσωπονthe face, counteπούςthe footδιδάσκωI teach
σύ
πλησίονnear, nearby, a καρδίαthe heart, innerἀποστέλλωI send forth, se
καίand, even, also, nam
πολύςmuch, many, ofteαὐτόςλαόςa people, the cr
ἀλλάbut, except
γαμίζωI give in marriaθέλωI will, wish, deφανερῶςclearly, openly
εἰμίI am, exist
ὥραan hour, seasonὅτιthat, since, becοὐNeg
ὡςas502×
what comes after →
ὁArticle the
κύριοςlord, Lord, mastἥλιοςthe sun, sunlighφῶςlight, a source
δέbut, on the other ha
πληρόωI fill, fulfill,γίνομαιI come into beinἀκούωI hear, listen
καίand, even, also, nam
ὁArticle theἐνἐγώ
φωνήa sound, noise, voic
ὕδωρwaterβροντήthunderἐν
ἐν
ὁArticle theοὐρανόςthe sky, the heaκρυπτόςhidden, secret

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὡς · 502× in the New Testament
Revelation Acts Luke Matthew 1 Corinthians John 2 Corinthians 1 Peter Hebrews Mark Romans Ephesians

Every reference is on the Strong's page.

Across the New Testament26 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
ὕαλοςhualos glass G5194 Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
commoner in Revelation than anywhere else in the New Testament
In plain English
Meaning
Glass refers to a clear, transparent material, as described in Revelation 21:18 and 21.
Amplified meaning
like crystal, transparent material
Tyndale gloss
glass
Greek lexiconskeyed to Strong's numbers
Layman’s summary of all Lexicon entries.generated

The Greek word ὕαλος (hualos) refers to glass or a clear, transparent stone. It is noted in various contexts, including its use in ancient glassware and as a material for enclosing mummies. The New Testament references it in Revelation 21:18, 21, where it describes the New Jerusalem. Some sources suggest it may derive from a word meaning 'raindrop,' while others propose an Egyptian origin.

Abbott-Smith, Manual Greek Lexicon of the NT

ὕαλος, -ου, ὁ

[in LXX: Jb 28:17 (זְכוּכִית) * ;]

(Hdt.) a clear transparent stone.

(from Plat. on) glass: Re 21:18, 21.†

Thayer's Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament from a scan

ὕαλος, -ov, 6, [prob. allied w. ὕει, ὑετός (q.¥.); hence ‘rain-drop’, Curtius § 604; Wanitek p. 1046; but al. make it of Egypt. origin (cf. L. and 8. 5. v.)], fr. Hat. ([3. 24] who writes ὕελος ; [ef. W. 22]) down; ale any stone transparent like glass. 2. glass: Rev. xxi. 18, 21.

Liddell-Scott-Jones, full edition

ὕαλος (hualos) — glass.

ὕᾰλος

or ὕελος (see. below), ἡ, see [Refs 4th c.BC+], ὁ:—the form ὕαλος is said to be Attic dialect, ὕελος Hellenic, [Refs 5th c.BC+] and ὕαλο; ὕελος is read in [NT+4th c.BC+]; compare ὑάλινος:—originally some kind of crystalline stone, such as that used by the Ethiopians to enclose their mummies in, [Refs 5th c.BC+]rock-crystal, [Refs 3rd c.AD+]

2. a convex lens of crystal, used as a burning-glass, λίθος διαφανὴς ἀφ᾽ ἧς τὸ πῦρ ἅπτουσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]

II. glass, first in [Refs 5th c.BC+]glass-ware, [Refs 4th c.AD+]

III. ὕαλος χνοώδης, in [Refs 7th c.AD+], is an absorbent of some kind:—ὕαλος is also explained by βόρβορος in [Refs 5th c.AD+]. [ῠᾰλος, as appears from [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—but late Poets make ῡ in some derivations to bring them into dactylic verses, ῡάλεος…

Read the full entry →
Strong's Greek Dictionary

ὕαλος

hualos

perhaps from the same as 5205 (as being transparent like rain);

glass:--glass.

see GREEK for 5205

Dodson Greek-English Lexicon

ὕαλος, ου, ἡ

n.m.

glass

Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary

ὕαλος hyalos 2x

a transparent stone, crystal; also, glass, Rev. 21:18, 21*

Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones

ὕαλος ὕα^λος, ορ ὕελος, ὁ, ἡ, a clear, transparent stone, used by the Egyptians to enclose their mummies in, oriental alabaster, Hdt.

a convex lens of crystal, used as a burning-glass, Ar.

glass, Lat. vitrum, Plat.: glass itself existed in the time of Hdt., but was not called ὕαλος till Plato's time.

The word is said to be Egyptian. Others refer it to ὕω, as if the orig. sense were raindrop.

Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Bible dictionarieson the English sense
International Standard Bible Encyclopedia

glas (zekhukhith; hualos):

1. History:

Glass is of great antiquity. The story of its discovery by accident, as related by Pliny (NH, xxxvi.65), is apocryphal, but it was natural for the Greeks and Romans to ascribe it to the Phoenicians, since they were the producers of the article as known to them. The Egyptian monuments have revealed to us the manufacture in a time so remote that it must have preceded that of the Phoenicians. A representation of glass-blowing on monuments of the Old Empire, as formerly supposed, is now regarded as doubtful, but undoubted examples of glazed pottery of that age exist. A fragment of blue glass has been found inscribed with the name of Antef III, of the XIth Dynasty, dating from 2000 or more BC (Davis, Ancient Egypt, 324). The oldest dated bottle, or vase, is one bearing the name of Thothmes III, 1500 or more BC, and numerous examples occur of later date.…

Easton's Bible Dictionary

Glass

Was known to the Egyptians at a very early period of their national history, at least B.C. 1500. Various articles both useful and ornamental were made of it, as bottles, vases, etc. A glass bottle with the name of Sargon on it was found among the ruins of the north-west palace of Nimroud. The Hebrew word zekukith (Job 28:17), rendered in the Authorized Version “crystal,” is rightly rendered in the Revised Version “glass.” This is the only allusion to glass found in the Old Testament. It is referred to in the New Testament in Rev. 4:6; 15:2; 21:18, 21. In Job 37:18, the word rendered “looking-glass” is in the Revised Version properly rendered “mirror,” formed, i.e., of some metal. (Comp.

The Hebrew word occurs only in (Job 28:17) where in the Authorized Version it is rendered "crystal." In spite of the absence of specific allusion to glass in the sacred writings, the Hebrews must have been aware of the invention from paintings representing the process of glass-blowing, which have been discovered at Beni-hassan, and in tombs at other places, we know that the invention vas known at least 3500 years ago. Fragments too of wine-vases as old as the exodus have been discovered in Egypt. The art was also known to the ancient Assyrians. In the New Testament glass is alluded to as an emblem of brightness. (Revelation 4:6; 15:2; 21:18)

American Tract Society Bible Dictionary

Was well known to the ancients, and no doubt to the Jews; its invention is traced to an incident on the coast to Phoenica, and the arts of blowing, coloring, and cutting it were familiar to the ancient Egyptians. The "looking glasses" of the Jews, however, were of highly polished metal, usually small and round, Ex 38:8 Job 37:18 Jas 1:23. Glass does not appear to have been used at that time for mirrors, nor for windows; but for cups, bottles, vases, ornaments, sacred emblems, etc. It is alluded to in 1Co 13:12 Re 4:6 15:2 21:18,21; probably also in Job 28:17, where…

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
50%as glass
as glass50% · 1×glass50% · 1×

2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

The phrases it lives inwhat stands either side of it, across the New Testament
← what comes before
ὅμοιοςlike, similar to
καθαρόςclean, pure, uns
ὡςas, like as, how, wh
καθαρόςclean, pure, uns
ὕαλοςglass2×
what comes after →
καθαρόςclean, pure, unstain
διαυγάζω

branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path

Concordanceὕαλος · 2× in the New Testament
Revelation
Across the New Testament1 of 27 books
MtMkLkJnAcRo1Co2CoGaEphPhpCol1Th2Th1Ti2TiTitPhmHebJas1Pe2Pe1Jn2Jn3JnJudRev
Outside the New Testamentthe same word in the Greek of its own century
Philo of Alexandria
Philo of AlexandriaOn the Embassy to Gaius 364c. AD 40

ἀρξαμένων δὲ λέγειν καὶ διδάσκειν, ἀπογευσάμενος τῆς δικαιολογίας καὶ συνεὶς ὡς οὐκ ἔστιν εὐκαταφρόνητος, πρὶν ἐπενεγκεῖν τὰ ἐχυρώτερα, συγκόψας καὶ τὰ πρότερα δρομαῖος εἰς τὸν μέγαν οἶκον εἰσεπήδησε καὶ περιελθὼν προστάττει τὰς ἐν κύκλῳ θυρίδας…

“And the twelve gates [were] twelve pearls. each one each of the gates was of one pearl. and the street of the city gold pure as glass translucent.”
διαυγής.diaugazō translucent. G6897 Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
2× in the NT scale is logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word, appears 19,867×
In plain English
Tyndale gloss
to shine through
Morphologythe parsing behind the code
Berean parsing
Adj-NSM — Adjective · nominative · singular · masculine
nominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
Robinson's Morphological Analysis Codes

A-NSM Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine

Into Englishhow translators actually render it
100%translucent
translucent100% · 1×

1 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.

Sources on this page. Lexicons and dictionaries imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate Liddell-Scott-Jones, Robinson and Packard, Webster and Cawdrey. Thayer’s Greek-English Lexicon of the New Testament (Harper, 1889 — Grimm’s Wilke’s Clavis Novi Testamenti, translated, revised and enlarged by Joseph Henry Thayer) is public domain and is set here from the Internet Archive page scan greekenglishlex00grim; it is uncorrected OCR, marked as such on the entry itself, and the Strong’s numbers — which Thayer’s own edition does not carry — were matched by lemma against the other modules on this page. Trench’s Synonyms of the New Testament (Macmillan, 1880) and Moulton and Milligan’s Vocabulary of the Greek Testament (Hodder & Stoughton, 1930, which entered the United States public domain on 1 January 2026) are set from Internet Archive page scans synonymsofnewtes00treniala and vocabularyofgree00mouluoft, and are likewise uncorrected OCR matched to Strong’s numbers by lemma. Trench treats a group of words at once, so the same essay stands on the page of each word it compares. The Mounce Concise Greek-English Dictionary is © 1993 and is used here by permission for non-commercial use, www.teknia.com/greek-dictionary. The full Liddell-Scott-Jones and the Hebrew word data (TAHOT) come from STEPBible.org, CC BY 4.0. Brown-Driver-Briggs is the OpenScriptures digitisation, public domain. Syntax analysis is the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (biblicalhumanities.org); the concordance and morphology are built from the tagged Nestle 1904 text. Septuagint occurrences use the Open Scriptures Septuagint lemma index, derived from CCAT (University of Pennsylvania) and the Rahlfs 1935 dataset by Eliran Wong, CC BY-NC-SA 4.0 — used here on a non-commercial ministry site. Greek of Josephus and Barnabas from the Perseus Digital Library, CC BY-SA 4.0. Commentaries and the Ante-Nicene Fathers are public-domain texts hosted on this site. Everyday Greek from the Duke Databank of Documentary Papyri, CC BY 3.0, with dates and provenance from the Heidelberger Gesamtverzeichnis. Philo and the Apostolic Fathers from Open Greek and Latin (First1KGreek), CC BY-SA 4.0. The apparatus and the fifth Greek column are the SBL Greek New Testament, © 2010 SBL and Logos Bible Software, CC BY 4.0. The Latin is the Clementine Vulgate (public domain); the Syriac New Testament is the ETCBC edition (MIT licence). The Hebrew behind the Greek is computed here from the Septuagint index and TAHOT, not taken from any aligned edition. The translation spread and the per-word edition marks come from the Translators Amalgamated Greek NT (STEPBible, CC BY 4.0); clause roles from the Nestle 1904 Lowfat treebank (CC BY-SA 4.0); place identifications and their confidence from OpenBible.info Bible Geocoding (CC BY 4.0), with map tiles © OpenStreetMap contributors. Gospel parallels are computed here from shared uncommon vocabulary, not taken from any printed harmony. Cross references are the Treasury of Scripture Knowledge and the subject headings are Nave’s Topical Bible, both public domain. Works under Creative Commons licences are used unchanged apart from markup removal.

Everything we make is available for free because of a generous community of supporters.

Donate